Click here to load reader
Upload
zedansean
View
997
Download
48
Embed Size (px)
DESCRIPTION
Grammar Practice book 3
Citation preview
www.harcourtschool.com
GrammarPractice Book
Grade 3
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_i.indd iRXENL08AWK31_GPB_i.indd i 9/14/06 3:44:47 PM9/14/06 3:44:47 PM
Copyright © by Harcourt, Inc.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form
or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording, or any information
storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publisher.
Permission is hereby granted to individuals using the corresponding student’s textbook or
kit as the major vehicle for regular classroom instruction to photocopy entire pages from
this publication in classroom quantities for instructional use and not for resale. Requests for
information on other matters regarding duplication of this work should be addressed to School
Permissions and Copyrights, Harcourt, Inc., 6277 Sea Harbor Drive, Orlando, Florida 32887-6777.
Fax: 407-345-2418.
HARCOURT and the Harcourt Logo are trademarks of Harcourt, Inc., registered in the United
States of America and/or other jurisdictions.
Printed in the United States of America
ISBN 10 0-15-349910-9
ISBN 13 978-0-15-3499104
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 073 12 11 10 09 08 07 06
If you have received these materials as examination copies free of charge, Harcourt School
Publishers retains title to the materials and they may not be resold. Resale of examination
copies is strictly prohibited and is illegal.
Possession of this publication in print format does not entitle users to convert this
publication, or any portion of it, into electronic format.
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_ii.indd iiRXENL08AWK31_GPB_ii.indd ii 9/14/06 4:17:06 PM9/14/06 4:17:06 PM
© Harcourt • Grade 3
Grammar Practice Book
ContentsTHEME 1
Lesson 1 Statements and Questions .................................................... 1
Lesson 2 Commands and Exclamations ............................................... 5
Lesson 3 Complete and Simple Subjects and Predicates ...................... 9
Lesson 4 Compound Subjects and Predicates .................................... 13
Lesson 5 Review ............................................................................... 17
THEME 2
Lesson 6 Simple and Compound Sentences ...................................... 19
Lesson 7 Common and Proper Nouns .............................................. 23
Lesson 8 Abbreviations ..................................................................... 27
Lesson 9 Singular and Plural Nouns .................................................. 31
Lesson 10 Review ............................................................................... 35
THEME 3
Lesson 11 Possessive Nouns ............................................................... 37
Lesson 12 Singular and Plural Pronouns .............................................. 41
Lesson 13 Subject and Object Pronouns ............................................. 45
Lesson 14 Pronoun-Antecedent Agreement ........................................ 49
Lesson 15 Review ............................................................................... 53
THEME 4
Lesson 16 Adjectives ........................................................................... 55
Lesson 17 Adjectives That Compare .................................................... 59
Lesson 18 Articles .............................................................................. 63
Lesson 19 Action Verbs ....................................................................... 67
Lesson 20 Review ............................................................................... 71
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_iii.indd iiiRXENL08AWK31_GPB_iii.indd iii 9/8/06 8:08:55 AM9/8/06 8:08:55 AM
© Harcourt • Grade 3
Grammar Practice Book
ContentsTHEME 5
Lesson 21 The Verb Be ........................................................................ 73
Lesson 22 Main and Helping Verbs ..................................................... 77
Lesson 23 Present-Tense Verbs ............................................................ 81
Lesson 24 Past-Tense and Future-Tense Verbs ...................................... 85
Lesson 25 Review ............................................................................... 89
THEME 6
Lesson 26 Irregular Verbs .................................................................... 91
Lesson 27 Adverbs .............................................................................. 95
Lesson 28 Contractions ....................................................................... 99
Lesson 29 Punctuation ...................................................................... 103
Lesson 30 Review ............................................................................. 107
Index .................................................................................................. 109
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_iv.indd ivRXENL08AWK31_GPB_iv.indd iv 9/8/06 8:09:09 AM9/8/06 8:09:09 AM
Name Statements and Questions
Lesson 1Rewrite each group of words to form a statement that makes sense. Use capital letters and end marks correctly.
1. Vaughn on Maple Street lives
2. he a student new is
3. math he enjoys
4. flute the he plays
5. from London is Andrea
6. science she good is at
7. lives she near park the
8. she likes dance to
9. teaches Mr. Jackson third grade
10. He the welcomes children new
1 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_001.indd 1RXENL08AWK31_GPB_001.indd 1 8/10/06 6:33:29 PM8/10/06 6:33:29 PM
Name Statements and Questions
Lesson 1Rewrite each group of words to form a questionthat makes sense. Use capital letters and end marks correctly.
1. you do a brother have
2. what his name is
3. he to school go does
4. he read can
5. play he does where
Turn each statement into a question. Use the word in parentheses ( ) as the first word.
6. My little sister’s name is Sara. (What)
7. She copies everything I do. (Why)
8. She meets me after school. (When)
9. She wants to go to the store. (Where)
2 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_002.indd 2RXENL08AWK31_GPB_002.indd 2 8/15/06 10:04:42 AM8/15/06 10:04:42 AM
Name Grammar–Writing Connection
Lesson 1Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) I to like skip. (2) Why do I skip (3) it is more
fun than walking. (4) I skip all the way to school (5)
With my friends at recess. (6) you like to
skip, too?
1. In which sentence are the words in an order that does not make sense?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
2. Which sentence does not tell a complete thought?A Sentence 1B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
3. Which sentence should end with a question mark?A Sentence 2B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
4. Which sentence is missing a period?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
5. Which word in Sentence 3 should be capitalized?A isB itC wayD fun
6. Which word would make sense in the blank in Sentence 6?A WhyB ButC DoD Where
Grammar Practice Book3
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_003.indd 3RXENL08AWK31_GPB_003.indd 3 8/15/06 10:05:00 AM8/15/06 10:05:00 AM
Name Statements and Questions
Lesson 1Add the correct end mark to each sentence.Then label each as a statement or a question.
1. Where is the teacher
2. I do not like to jump
3. When does Anita run
4. Do you know Mr. Wang
5. We play in the grass
Rewrite each group of words to form a statement or a question. Put the words in an order that makes sense. Use capital letters and end marks correctly.
6. to the park I go (statement)
7. do walk you to school (question)
8. Willow ball the throws (statement)
9. can Kurt play softball (statement)
10. you can football play (question)
4 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_004.indd 4RXENL08AWK31_GPB_004.indd 4 8/15/06 10:05:24 AM8/15/06 10:05:24 AM
Name Commands and Exclamations
Lesson 2Rewrite each sentence, using capital letters andend marks correctly. Then label each as a commandor an exclamation.
1. give the book to Violet
2. what a great author he is
3. how excited I am to read his new story
4. let your brother read
5. oops, I lost the book
6. help me find it
7. search in the living room
8. wow, it is a mess in here
9. hurray, here it is
10. look at the pretty cover
5 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_005.indd 5RXENL08AWK31_GPB_005.indd 5 8/10/06 6:34:19 PM8/10/06 6:34:19 PM
Name Commands and Exclamations
Lesson 2Rewrite each sentence, using capital letters andend marks correctly. Then label each as a statement,a question, a command, or an exclamation.
1. Cathy wants to be a writer
2. read Cathy’s story
3. what does she write about
4. what a good writer Cathy is
Add words and end marks to make four kinds of sentences out of the words in the box.
the things Cathy does
5. a question
6. a statement
7. an exclamation
8. a command
6 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_006.indd 6RXENL08AWK31_GPB_006.indd 6 9/18/06 6:25:18 PM9/18/06 6:25:18 PM
Name Grammar–WritingConnection
Lesson 2Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) Wow, today was an exciting day. (2) What an
interesting time we had (3) A firefighter visited our
school. (4) Our teacher how to prepare. (5) She told
us to think of questions to ask the firefighter (6) What
question do you think I asked.
1. Which sentence should end with an exclamation point?A Sentence 1B Sentence 4C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
2. Which sentence should end with a question mark?A Sentence 1B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 6
3. Which end mark should Sentence 2 have?A a periodB a commaC a question markD an exclamation point
4. Which end mark should end Sentence 5 have?A a periodB a commaC a question markD an exclamation point
5. Which sentence is not complete?A Sentence 1B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 6
6. Which sentence is correct?A Sentence 2B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 6
7 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_007.indd 7RXENL08AWK31_GPB_007.indd 7 9/18/06 6:25:39 PM9/18/06 6:25:39 PM
Name Commands and Exclamations
Lesson 2If the sentence is complete, add a correct endmark. If the sentence is not complete, write nota sentence.
1. My father is an author
2. How he loves to write
3. How do I help him
4. Things that he can write about
5. Read his latest book
6. Wow, it’s exciting
Add words and end marks to make four kinds of sentences.Each sentence is started for you.
7. a statement
You
8. a command
Go
9. an exclamation
What
10. a question
What
8 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_008.indd 8RXENL08AWK31_GPB_008.indd 8 8/10/06 6:35:56 PM8/10/06 6:35:56 PM
Name Complete and
Simple Subjects and Predicates
Lesson 3
Choose four sentences from a book or magazine. Write the sentences. Underline the simple subjects.
Underline the simple subject. Write the predicate.
1. Lisa went to boarding school.
2. My good friend learned at home.
3. He rode the bus to school.
4. His older sister studied dance.
5. I went to school.
6. Leroy enjoyed college.
7. The high school student worked on Sundays.
8. Dad helped my brother.
9. The little girl painted pictures.
9 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_009.indd 9RXENL08AWK31_GPB_009.indd 9 8/10/06 6:37:05 PM8/10/06 6:37:05 PM
Name Complete and
Simple Subjects and Predicates
Lesson 3Underline the complete predicate. Write thesimple predicate.
1. Hannah likes math.
2. Science is my favorite subject.
3. Jamil studies French every day.
4. My cousin wears a uniform to school.
5. The teacher plans her lesson carefully.
6. The boys clean their desks.
7. The children read quietly.
8. Some students use a computer.
9. Everyone enjoys the class trip.
10. Valerie practices the trumpet.
10 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_010.indd 10RXENL08AWK31_GPB_010.indd 10 8/10/06 6:37:57 PM8/10/06 6:37:57 PM
Name Grammar–Writing Connection
Lesson 3Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) My little brother is five years old. (2) He goes
to kindergarten. (3) Kindergarten fun. (4) The young
children learn with toys and games.
1. Which is the complete subject of Sentence 1?A My littleB brotherC My little brotherD is five years old
2. Which is the complete predicate of Sentence 1?A isB five years oldC My little brotherD is five years old
3. Which is the simple subject of Sentence 2?A He goesB to kindergartenC HeD goes
4. Which is the simple predicate of Sentence 2?A HeB goes C goes to kindergartenD to kindergarten
5. Which is the complete subject of Sentence 4?A The young childrenB childrenC children learnD learn
6. Which sentence does not have a correct predicate?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 4
11 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_011.indd 11RXENL08AWK31_GPB_011.indd 11 8/15/06 10:06:45 AM8/15/06 10:06:45 AM
Name Complete and
Simple Subjects and Predicates
Lesson 3Add a complete subject to each predicate.Then underline the simple subject.
1. went to school.
2. played outside.
3. ate lunch.
4. took a nap.
5. performed on stage.
6. was made of brick.
Add a complete predicate to each subject. Then underline the simple predicate.
7. An art teacher .
8. The excited children .
9. He .
10. My mother .
11. The school .
12. The tired baby .
12 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_012.indd 12RXENL08AWK31_GPB_012.indd 12 8/10/06 6:40:13 PM8/10/06 6:40:13 PM
Name Compound
Subjects and Predicates
Lesson 4Rewrite each pair of sentences as one sentence.Draw one line under each compound subject andtwo lines under each compound predicate.
1. Juan played the piano. His sister played the piano.
2. The children worked hard. The children practiced every day.
3. Music filled the room. Laughter filled the room.
4. Michelle wanted to write poems. Diego wanted to write poems.
5. They wrote in their notebooks. They studied with a teacher.
6. My uncle went to school. My uncle learned to cook.
7. Carmen loved soccer. Her cousin loved soccer.
8. They played together. They won trophies.
9. Mr. Han’s students talked. Mr. Han’s students made plans.
13 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_013.indd 13RXENL08AWK31_GPB_013.indd 13 9/18/06 6:25:59 PM9/18/06 6:25:59 PM
Name Compound
Subjects and Predicates
Lesson 4Write the compound subject of each sentence.Add commas where they belong.
1. Ravi his grandmother and his grandfather went to the school concert.
2. Ravi’s teacher his neighbor and his friend were in the audience.
3. The violins cellos and flutes sounded beautiful.
4. The drums cymbals and gong played an exciting ending.
5. A tall woman a short man and a child left the hall first.
Write the compound predicate of each sentence. Add commas where they belong.
6. Ravi went home changed into pajamas and climbed into bed.
7. He lay down fell asleep and dreamed he was a musician.
8. He played a solo bowed and smiled at the audience.
9. The audience stood up clapped and cheered.
14 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_014.indd 14RXENL08AWK31_GPB_014.indd 14 8/10/06 6:41:42 PM8/10/06 6:41:42 PM
Name Grammar-WritingConnection
Lesson 4Read this part of a student’s rough draft.Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) Madeline and Ella were sisters. (2) They wanted to be doctors
when they grew up. (3) Their mother shared their goal. (4) Their father
shared their goal. (5) The girls worked hard and got good grades.
(6) They got into a special school succeeded and became doctors.
1. Which sentence has a compound subject?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
2. Which sentence needscommas to separate the compound predicates?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
3. Which sentences could be joined to make one sentence with a compound subject? A Sentences 2 and 3B Sentences 3 and 4C Sentences 4 and 5D Sentences 5 and 6
4. Which sentence has a compound predicate that is written correctly?A Sentence 1B Sentence 3C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
5. Which of these sentences does not have a compound subject or a compound predicate?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
6. Which of these possible final sentences has a compound subject?A Their dream came true.B The sisters and their parents
had a dream that came true.C They healed and cured.D People admired them.
15 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_015.indd 15RXENL08AWK31_GPB_015.indd 15 8/15/06 10:08:08 AM8/15/06 10:08:08 AM
Name Compound
Subjects and Predicates
Lesson 4Add a compound subject or a compound predicate to complete each sentence.
1. studied art.
2. The athletes .
3. The music student .
4. took dance classes.
5. The actor .
6. watched the stars.
Rewrite each sentence. Add commas where they belong.Draw one line under each compound subject and two linesunder each compound predicate.
7. The soccer player ran kicked and scored.
8. Exercise rest and healthful food made the swimmer strong.
9. Raja his sister and his brother were good students.
10. The scientist wrote a book won a prize and gave a speech.
16 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_016.indd 16RXENL08AWK31_GPB_016.indd 16 8/10/06 6:44:55 PM8/10/06 6:44:55 PM
Name Grammar–Writing Connection
Lesson 5Read this part of a student’s rough draft.Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) There is something new in Room 112 (2) Can you
guess what it is (3) our rabbit has four babies. (4) How tiny
the bunnies are! (5) Wish could take one home. (6) Do you
bunnies like?
1. Which sentence should end with a period?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 4D Sentence 6
2. Which sentence should end with a question mark?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 4
3. In which sentence are the words in an order that does not make sense?A Sentence 2B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 6
4. Which word in Sentence 3 should be capitalized?A ourB rabbitC fourD babies
5. Which of the following is NOT a complete sentence?A Sentence 1B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
6. Which sentence is correct asit is?A Sentence 3B Sentence 4C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
17 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_017.indd 17RXENL08AWK31_GPB_017.indd 17 8/15/06 10:08:35 AM8/15/06 10:08:35 AM
Name
Lesson 5
Grammar–Writing Connection
Read this part of a student’s rough draft.Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) Eric watched the news on TV. (2) His father
watched the news on TV. (3) The newscaster talked
about special events. (4) A police officer a firefighter
and a teacher taught third graders about safety. (5) The
mayor took a trip and gave a speech.
1. Which is the simple subject of Sentence 1?A EricB Eric watchedC the newsD watched the news on TV
2. Which is the complete predicate of Sentence 3?A the newscasterB the newscaster talkedC talkedD talked about special events
3. What is missing in Sentence 4?A commasB a subjectC a simple predicateD a complete predicate
4. Which sentence has a compound subject?A Sentence 1B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
5. Which sentence has a compound predicate?A Sentence 2B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
6. Which sentences could be joined to make one sentence with a compound subject? A Sentences 1 and 2B Sentences 2 and 3C Sentences 3 and 4D Sentences 4 and 5
18 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_018.indd 18RXENL08AWK31_GPB_018.indd 18 9/18/06 6:26:29 PM9/18/06 6:26:29 PM
Name Simple and Compound Sentences
Lesson 6If the sentence is complete, label it as simple or compound. If it is a fragment, add words to make it complete.
1. My big sister has a job.
2. After school.
3. She works at a pet store.
4. She feeds the animals, and she cleans their cages.
5. Sweeps the floor.
6. My sister enjoys her job, but she also likes weekends.
7. She spends time with friends, or she relaxes at home.
8. My brother is sixteen, and he works on weekends.
9. He packs bags at a supermarket.
10. My family.
19 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_019.indd 19RXENL08AWK31_GPB_019.indd 19 8/15/06 10:09:48 AM8/15/06 10:09:48 AM
Name Simple and Compound Sentences
Lesson 6Use the words in the parentheses ( ) to join the pairs of sentences. Use commas correctly.
1. Today is Sunday. Andy goes to a football game. (and)
3. He is excited. He eats breakfast quickly. (and)
2. Linda wants to go with Andy. She is sick. (but)
4. Andy’s mother goes to the game. His father stays home. (but)
5. Tanya has strong legs. She loves to run. (and)
6. She likes softball. She likes basketball more. (but)
7. Some children play in the gym. Anna plays in the park. (but)
8. It is a hot day. Children sell lemonade. (and)
9. Darnell likes lemonade. He likes milk more. (but)
10. He walks to the store. He buys milk. (and)
20 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_020.indd 20RXENL08AWK31_GPB_020.indd 20 8/15/06 10:10:28 AM8/15/06 10:10:28 AM
Name Grammar–Writing Connection
Lesson 6Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) Maya is a third grader, or she helps her family. (2) She washes the
dishes, and she waters the plants. (3) Also cleans her room. (4) Maya’s
father makes breakfast most mornings. (5) Today he leaves early for work.
(6) Maya’s brother cooks eggs, he serves them to his family.
1. Which sentence is not complete?A Sentence 2B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
2. Which sentence is a correct compound sentence?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 4D Sentence 6
3. Which sentence has an incorrect joining word?A Sentence 1 B Sentence 2C Sentence 5 D Sentence 6
4. Sentence 5 is .A missing a joining wordB not completeC a simple sentenceD a compound sentence
5. Which word would BEST follow the comma in Sentence 6?A andB butC orD today
6. Which sentences could be joined with a comma followed by but?A Sentences 1 and 2B Sentences 3 and 4C Sentences 4 and 5D Sentences 5 and 6
21 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_021.indd 21RXENL08AWK31_GPB_021.indd 21 8/15/06 10:11:21 AM8/15/06 10:11:21 AM
Name Simple and Compound Sentences
Lesson 6Rewrite the sentences. Use commas and joining words correctly.
1. My father is a teacher and he works at a school.
2. He drives to work, he takes a bus.
3. He has lunch at work or he eats in the park.
4. Most days he eats tuna, today he eats egg salad.
Rewrite each pair of sentences as one sentence. Use commas and the joining words and or but correctly.
5. Mrs. Lopez loves to read. She owns a bookstore.
6. The store is small. It has many books.
7. Sasha works with animals. She enjoys her job.
8. She lives in the country. She works in the city.
22 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_022.indd 22RXENL08AWK31_GPB_022.indd 22 8/15/06 10:15:23 AM8/15/06 10:15:23 AM
Name Common and Proper Nouns
Lesson 7Underline the common nouns. Circle the proper nouns.
1. Officer Chan is from Dallas, Texas.
2. Marta has a dog named Rufus.
3. The family adopts two tiny kittens.
4. Fish swim in the Atlantic Ocean.
5. Kangaroos and koalas live in Australia.
6. Steve visits the big zoo in Los Angeles.
7. The children see a pretty deer.
8. There are many seals in Canada and Greenland.
9. Charlie rides a black horse at the fair.
10. Mr. Jones feeds the birds in Central Park.
11. People watch bats in Gainesville , Florida.
12. Buffy is a white dog, and Puff is an orange cat.
Find an article in a magazine. List five common nouns from the article. Then list five proper nouns.
23 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_023.indd 23RXENL08AWK31_GPB_023.indd 23 8/15/06 10:14:00 AM8/15/06 10:14:00 AM
Name Common and Proper Nouns
Lesson 7Rewrite each sentence correctly. Capitalize the proper nouns.
1. A zookeeper came to class on thursday.
2. Emma got a rabbit on valentine’s day.
3. On saturday we visited the animal park.
4. The children learned about the first thanksgiving.
5. The first day of winter was wednesday, december 21.
6. Presidents’ day was in february.
7. Which holiday was on friday, november 11?
8. Elijah went to the beach every sunday in july.
9. The family went on vacation in december.
10. The memorial day picnic was on monday, may 28.
24 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_024.indd 24RXENL08AWK31_GPB_024.indd 24 8/15/06 10:14:48 AM8/15/06 10:14:48 AM
Name Grammar–Writing Connection
Lesson 7
(1) Robin and Pam are sisters, and they live in Michigan. (2) Their
family got a new puppy on labor day. (3) Daisy is a guide dog, and she will
help blind people when she grows up. (4) The children and their parents
raise the puppy. (5) Every they go to a dog training class
in Detroit.
Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
1. Which word in Sentence 1 is a common noun?A RobinB sistersC liveD Michigan
2. Which word or words in Sentence 2 should be capitalized?A familyB newC puppyD labor day
3. Which of these words in Sentence 3 is NOT a noun?A DaisyB dogC growsD people
4. How many nouns are in Sentence 4?A 1B 2C 3D 4
5. A proper noun belongs in the blank in Sentence 5. Which word is correct?A SaturdayB weekC HolidayD april
6. Which sentence does NOT have a proper noun?A Sentence 1B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
25 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_025.indd 25RXENL08AWK31_GPB_025.indd 25 9/18/06 6:26:56 PM9/18/06 6:26:56 PM
Name Common and Proper Nouns
Lesson 7Rewrite each sentence correctly.
1. danny has a Partner in the classroom.
2. Her Name is ann.
3. Danny and ann study every Afternoon.
4. On fridays the Children learn math.
Rewrite each sentence correctly. Underline the common nouns. Circle the proper nouns.
5. Independence day was on tuesday.
6. Yani’s class went to new york city and saw fireworks.
7. Lights filled the sky over the hudson river.
8. The Students wrote a report about their trip.
26 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_026.indd 26RXENL08AWK31_GPB_026.indd 26 8/15/06 10:20:58 AM8/15/06 10:20:58 AM
Name Abbreviations
Lesson 8Write the abbreviations for the underlined words.
1. Jean-Luc visits the United States.
2. Springfield is a city in Illinois.
3. Doctor Witky lives on Pine Road.
4. Tanisha is from New Mexico, but now she lives in Oregon.
5. The police station is on the corner of East Street and North Avenue.
6. Washington is next to California.
7. Mistress Rosen owns a house in Rhode Island.
8. Write to Mister Ngo at 122 Long Avenue, Gary, Indiana.
9. Lake Erie is north of Ohio, Pennsylvania, and New York.
10. Doctor Harrison takes a bus from Mississippi to Alabama.
27 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_027.indd 27RXENL08AWK31_GPB_027.indd 27 8/15/06 11:08:44 AM8/15/06 11:08:44 AM
Name Abbreviations
Lesson 8Write the abbreviation for each word.
1. January
2. Saturday
3. Wednesday
4. March
5. September
6. Friday
Correct the abbreviations.
7. Oct 19
8. aug. 25
9. mon, feb. 5
10. tues, nov 9
28 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_028.indd 28RXENL08AWK31_GPB_028.indd 28 9/18/06 6:27:21 PM9/18/06 6:27:21 PM
Name Grammar–Writing Connection
Lesson 8
(1) Block studies the animals in the ocean.
(2) He came to our school on Thursday, December 29.
(3) Our school is in ME. (4) He drove his car from MA.
(5) The students in Mistress Lewis’s class enjoyed his talk.
1. Which abbreviation could go in the blank in Sentence 1?A MrB mrC Mr. D dr.
2. Which is the correct abbreviation for the underlined word in Sentence 2?A thu.B THC ThursD Thurs.
3. Which is the correct abbreviation for the month in Sentence 2?A Dec.B dec.C DED dec
4. Which word should replace the abbreviation in Sentence 3?A MassachusettsB MaineC MinnesotaD Mississippi
5. Which word should replace the abbreviation in Sentence 4?A MassachusettsB MaineC MinnesotaD Montana
6. Which is the correct abbreviation for the underlined word in Sentence 5?A Mrs B Mrs. C Ms D Ms.
Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
29 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_029.indd 29RXENL08AWK31_GPB_029.indd 29 8/15/06 11:11:26 AM8/15/06 11:11:26 AM
Name Abbreviations
Lesson 8Write the full word for each abbreviation.
1. FL
2. Tues.
3. Dr.
4. St.
5. Apr.
Find the words in each sentence that have abbreviations. Write the abbreviations.
6. Mister Ward’s party is on Sunday, November 5.
7. Send the letter to Doctor Johnson at 5 Mesa Street, El Paso, Texas.
8. In September, Mistress Torres’s class goes to the animal shelter on River Avenue.
9. Tennessee and Missouri are next to Kentucky.
10. Mistress Brecht spoke at the school on Barstow Road on Friday.
30 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_030.indd 30RXENL08AWK31_GPB_030.indd 30 8/15/06 11:17:08 AM8/15/06 11:17:08 AM
Name Singular and Plural Nouns
Lesson 9Rewrite each sentence using the plural form of the underlined noun. Use the word in parentheses ( ) before each plural noun.
1. Ari bakes a cake. (two)
2. He puts them in a box. (two)
3. Please buy a banana. (some)
4. We need a bunch. (three)
5. Lily picks a berry. (ten)
6. Marco wants a cookie. (four)
7. Abby eats a pear. (two)
8. She gives her sister a cherry. (five)
9. My father cuts a pepper. (two)
10. My brother eats a bite. (three)
31 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_031.indd 31RXENL08AWK31_GPB_031.indd 31 8/15/06 11:17:21 AM8/15/06 11:17:21 AM
Name Singular and Plural Nouns
Lesson 9Rewrite each sentence using the plural form of the underlined noun. Use a dictionary if you need to. Each new sentence is started for you.
1. One child had cereal for breakfast.
Three
2. One woman baked brownies.
Two
3. One mouse ran to the food bowl.
Three
4. One deer pulled leaves from the tree.
Four
5. One goose ate the bread.
Five
Rewrite each sentence. Replace the singular nouns in parentheses ( ) with the plural form. Use a dictionary if you need to.
6. Billy’s (foot) are tired.
7. Billy and the (man) cook soup for dinner.
8. After dinner he brushes his (tooth).
32 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_032.indd 32RXENL08AWK31_GPB_032.indd 32 8/15/06 11:18:26 AM8/15/06 11:18:26 AM
Name Grammar–Writing Connection
Lesson 9
1. Which is the correct plural form of the underlined word in Sentence 2?A dishsB dishiesC dishesD dish
2. Which is the correct plural form of the underlined word in Sentence 3?A forkesB forksC forkiesD fork
3. Which word in Sentence 4 is NOT a plural noun?A putsB glassesC menD women
4. The underlined word in Sentence 5 should be in its plural form. Which is correct?A childB childsC childesD children
5. A singular noun belongs in the blank in Sentence 6. Which word is correct?A dinnersB dineriesC dinner’sD dinner
6. Which sentence does NOT have a plural noun?A Sentence 1 B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
(1) It is Josh’s turn to set the table. (2) He uses his family’s
best dish. (3) He takes out a fork and spoons. (4) He puts out
glasses for the men and women. (5) He puts out cups for the
child. (6) Now can be served.
Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
33 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_033.indd 33RXENL08AWK31_GPB_033.indd 33 9/18/06 6:27:51 PM9/18/06 6:27:51 PM
Name Singular and Plural Nouns
Lesson 9Write the correct plural form of each singular noun. Use a dictionary if you need to.
1. pot
2. raspberry
3. tomato
4. meal
5. rabbit
6. moose
7. sheep
8. puppy
Rewrite the sentences. Use the plural forms of the nouns in parentheses ( ). Use a dictionary if you need to.
9. The (child) made (sandwich).
10. Amber sliced (carrot) and (apple).
11. Do you want (blueberry) or (peach)?
12. Brush your (tooth) after you eat the (strawberry).
34 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_034.indd 34RXENL08AWK31_GPB_034.indd 34 8/15/06 11:24:13 AM8/15/06 11:24:13 AM
Name
Lesson 10
Grammar–Writing Connection
Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) Mrs. Sanchez’s class performed a play on , October 2.
(2) The Play was at the Madison Elementary School. (3) At 7:00 p.m.
(4) My sister Elaine acted, she did a great job. (5) My bedtime is
8:00 p.m. (6) My parents let me stay up late to watch the play.
1. Which word could go in the blank in Sentence 1?A MondayB tuesdayC eveningD lunchtime
2. Which word in Sentence 2 is incorrectly capitalized?A PlayB MadisonC ElementaryD School
3. Which word should follow the comma in Sentence 4?A butB orC andD tonight
4. Which is the proper noun in Sentence 4?A sisterB ElaineC greatD job
5. Which two simple sentences could be joined by a comma followed by but?A Sentences 1 and 2B Sentences 3 and 4C Sentences 4 and 5D Sentences 5 and 6
6. Which sentence is NOT complete?A Sentence 2B Sentence 3C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
35 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_035.indd 35RXENL08AWK31_GPB_035.indd 35 8/15/06 11:29:07 AM8/15/06 11:29:07 AM
Name
Lesson 10
Grammar–Writing Connection
Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) There is a mystery to solve at 10 Mountain Road.
(2) The Brooks children can’t find their puppy. (3) What
are the clue? (4) The door is open, and cookies are baking
in the house across the street. (5) Brooks says she
knows where the puppy is. (6) Do you?
1. What is the abbreviation for the underlined word in Sentence 1?A rdB rd.C Rd.D RD
2. What is the correct plural form of the noun in Sentence 3?A clueB cluesC clueesD cluies
3. How many SINGULAR nouns are in Sentence 4?A twoB threeC fourD five
4. How many PLURAL nouns are in Sentence 4?A oneB twoC threeD four
5. Which abbreviation could go in the blank in Sentence 5?A mrsB MrsC MSD Mrs.
6. Which sentence has an irregular plural noun?A Sentence 2B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
36 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_036.indd 36RXENL08AWK31_GPB_036.indd 36 8/15/06 11:30:07 AM8/15/06 11:30:07 AM
Name Possessive Nouns
Lesson 11Write the possessive noun in each sentence.Label it as singular or plural.
1. Rico’s family has three children.
2. My brothers’ toys are on the floor.
3. Her sister’s name is Kristen.
4. Mason rides in his aunt’s car.
5. The families’ homes are nearby.
6. The boys’ grandfather comes to visit.
7. What is your mother’s job?
8. Shane wears his cousin’s hat.
9. Mr. Daly enjoys his sons’ softball game.
10. The dog’s leash is on the table.
37 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_037.indd 37RXENL08AWK31_GPB_037.indd 37 8/15/06 11:31:42 AM8/15/06 11:31:42 AM
Name Possessive Nouns
Lesson 11If the underlined word needs an apostrophe (’),rewrite it correctly. If it is correct, write correct.
1. Ms. Roth held her daughters hand.
2. The schools auditorium was full.
3. The boys performed in a play.
4. My fathers camera was broken.
5. The student read two poems.
6. How many songs did they sing?
Write the plural form of each noun. Then write the plural possessive form.
7. uncle
8. grandson
9. violinist
10. glass
11. cherry
12. banana
38 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_038.indd 38RXENL08AWK31_GPB_038.indd 38 8/15/06 11:32:37 AM8/15/06 11:32:37 AM
Name
Lesson 11
Grammar–WritingConnection
Read this part of a student’s rough draft.Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) Mr. Kwon class put on a show. (2) The students families
were in the audience. (3) The student’s performed different
acts. (4) The act of Rachel was funny. (5) Rachel’s parents
smiled and clapped. (6) All the parents enjoyed the show.
1. Which singular possessive noun should be a plural noun?A show (Sentence 1)B audience (Sentence 2)C student’s (Sentence 3)D act (Sentence 4)
2. Which singular noun should also be possessive?A Mr. Kwon (Sentence 1)B audience (Sentence 2)C act (Sentence 4)D show (Sentence 6)
3. Which plural noun should also be possessive?A students (Sentence 2)B families (Sentence 2)C acts (Sentence 3)D parents (Sentence 5)
4. How could you rewritethe underlined phrase in Sentence 4?A the act’s of RachelB the acts of RachelC Rachel’s actD Rachels’ act
5. Which other word could replace parents in Sentence 6?A parents’B families’C students’D families
6. Which sentence is correct as it is written?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 5
39 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_039.indd 39RXENL08AWK31_GPB_039.indd 39 8/15/06 11:33:42 AM8/15/06 11:33:42 AM
Name Possessive Nouns
Lesson 11Rewrite each phrase. Use the correctpossessive noun.
1. the costumes that belong to the girls
2. the dance of Ron
3. the necklace owned by her grandmother
4. the bottles of the babies
5. the sleeves of the dresses
6. the car that belongs to my mother
Write sentences using the noun below. The words in parentheses ( ) tell which form of the noun to use.
dancer
7. (singular)
8. (plural)
9. (singular possessive)
10. (plural possessive)
40 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_040.indd 40RXENL08AWK31_GPB_040.indd 40 8/15/06 11:36:16 AM8/15/06 11:36:16 AM
Name Singular and Plural Pronouns
Lesson 12Write the two singular pronouns in each sentence.
1. She sent me a postcard.
2. Where did he put it?
3. I gave her the box.
4. It was a gift for you.
5. You spoke to him today.
6. He saw you yesterday.
7. She told me the story.
8. I enjoyed reading it.
9. You wrote a letter to her.
10. Did it interest him?
41 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_041.indd 41RXENL08AWK31_GPB_041.indd 41 8/15/06 2:20:05 PM8/15/06 2:20:05 PM
Name Singular and Plural Pronouns
Lesson 12Write the plural pronoun in each sentence.
1. We took a flight to Mexico.
2. My aunt and uncle met us at the airport.
3. They smiled and said “Welcome!”
4. My sister was excited to see them.
Rewrite each sentence. Use a plural pronoun to replace each underlined phrase.
5. The girls went to camp last summer.
6. The girls wrote to my friend and me.
7. My friend and I wrote to the girls.
8. My friend and I told the girls about our soccer team.
9. Did you and your brother send letters to the girls?
10. The girls were happy to get the letters.
11. The letters arrived every Monday.
12. They just got a letter from Mom and Dad.
42 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_042.indd 42RXENL08AWK31_GPB_042.indd 42 8/15/06 2:21:34 PM8/15/06 2:21:34 PM
Name
Lesson 12
Grammar–WritingConnection
Read this part of a student’s rough draft.Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) Natasha has a pen pal named Chen. (2) Chen lives in
China. (3) Natasha and Chen write every week. (4) Natasha
and Chen tell each other about the things they do. (5) Last
week Natasha wrote to Chen about the school play. (6) Natasha
told him that everyone enjoyed the play.
1. Which sentence has a singular pronoun?A Sentence 1B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 6
2. Which sentence has a plural pronoun?A Sentence 1B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 6
3. Which pronoun could replace the underlined word in Sentence 2?A HeB HimC TheyD It
4. Which pronoun could replace the underlined words in Sentence 4?A HeB SheC TheyD Them
5. Which pronoun could replace the underlined word in Sentence 6?A ItB SheC HerD They
6. Which word(s) could be replaced by the pronoun it ?A Natasha (Sentence 1)B Natasha and Chen
(Sentence 3)C week (Sentence 5)D the play (Sentence 6)
43 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_043.indd 43RXENL08AWK31_GPB_043.indd 43 8/15/06 2:23:12 PM8/15/06 2:23:12 PM
Name Singular and Plural Pronouns
Lesson 12Write the pronoun in each sentence.Then label each as S (singular) or P (plural).
1. We learned about Chile today.
2. Mr. Edwards showed us two maps.
3. He hung the maps on the wall.
4. They showed volcanoes and a desert.
5. The students looked at them carefully.
6. Mr. Edwards asked me to point to the desert.
Rewrite each sentence with a correct pronoun.
7. Ellen studied Spanish because wanted to visit Spain.
8. The class was fun, and the students enjoyed .
9. The teacher brought pictures to show .
10. He took the pictures when was in Spain.
44 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_044.indd 44RXENL08AWK31_GPB_044.indd 44 8/15/06 2:25:32 PM8/15/06 2:25:32 PM
Name Subject andObject Pronouns
Lesson 13Write the pronoun in each sentence. Thenlabel each pronoun as subject or object.
1. Ms. Edison teaches us about flowers.
2. A student asks her how flowers grow.
3. Ms. Edison answers him.
4. She talks to the class about sunlight.
5. Flowers need it to make food and grow.
6. We learn more about flowers.
7. Bees collect pollen from them.
8. I write a paper on flowers.
Find four sentences in a book or magazine that have pronouns. Copy the sentences. Underline the subject pronouns. Circle the object pronouns.
45 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_045.indd 45RXENL08AWK31_GPB_045.indd 45 8/15/06 2:27:34 PM8/15/06 2:27:34 PM
Name Subject andObject Pronouns
Lesson 13Rewrite each sentence. Use subjectpronouns correctly.
1. Me and Anna went to the library.
2. I and she studied trees.
3. You and me looked at books and pictures.
4. Me and he learned about pine trees.
5. I and Deon wrote a report together.
Rewrite each sentence. Use object pronouns correctly.
6. Show the flowers to Ryan and I.
7. My mother gave me and my sister a plant.
8. Please help him and I with the report.
9. Jenny came to the library with him and I.
10. The librarian offered to help me and Ryan.
46 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_046.indd 46RXENL08AWK31_GPB_046.indd 46 8/15/06 2:28:35 PM8/15/06 2:28:35 PM
Name
Lesson 13
Grammar–WritingConnection
Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) Me and my mother planted an apple seed in a pot.
(2) We watered the seed. (3) The seed grew leaves and roots.
(4) My mother moved it to the yard. (5) I watched my mother
pack soil around the little plant. (6) One day the seed will
become an apple tree.
1. Which sentence has a singular subject pronoun?A Sentence 2B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
2. Which sentence has a plural subject pronoun?A Sentence 2B Sentence 4C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
3. Which type of pronoun is it in Sentence 4?A singular subject pronounB plural subject pronounC singular object pronounD plural object pronoun
4. How should the underlined phrase in Sentence 1 be written?A My mother and meB Me and herC Her and meD My mother and I
5. Which of these could replace the underlined words in Sentence 3?A a singular subject pronounB a plural subject pronounC a singular object pronounD a plural object pronoun
6. Which of these could replace the underlined words in Sentence 5?A a singular subject pronounB a plural subject pronounC a singular object pronounD a plural object pronoun
47 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_047.indd 47RXENL08AWK31_GPB_047.indd 47 8/15/06 2:29:54 PM8/15/06 2:29:54 PM
Name Subject andObject Pronouns
Lesson 13Write a subject or object pronoun to replace each underlined word or phrase.
1. Ariel’s sister taught Ariel about bees.
2. Ariel’s sister told Ariel that bees are insects.
3. Ariel and I watched bees in the park.
4. Ariel and I saw the bees fly.
5. Ariel’s father gave Ariel and me a book.
6. The book had pictures of bees.
Rewrite each sentence. Use I and me correctly.
7. You and me picked pears from the tree.
8. Todd ate cherries with my friend and I.
9. Me and my brother sliced apples.
10. They shared the plums with me and him.
48 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_048.indd 48RXENL08AWK31_GPB_048.indd 48 8/15/06 2:33:23 PM8/15/06 2:33:23 PM
Name Pronoun–
AntecedentAgreement
Lesson 14Write the correct pronoun for each sentence.Then write the noun that it refers to.
1. A bird catches worms and brings (it/them) back to the nest.
2. A mouse eats the crumbs that (it/they) finds.
3. The dogs see the man, and (him/they) start to bark.
4. John sees Michael and waves to (him/them).
5. Squirrels gather nuts and hide (it/them).
6. A spider spins a web and traps flies in (it/them).
7. Bats eat the insects that (it/they) catch.
8. Simon sees two little kittens and stops to pet (him/them).
9. A bear goes into a cave, where (it/they) sleeps all winter.
10. The boys buy a gift for Mrs. Johnson and give it to (her/them).
49 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_049.indd 49RXENL08AWK31_GPB_049.indd 49 8/15/06 2:35:34 PM8/15/06 2:35:34 PM
Name Pronoun-
AntecedentAgreement
Lesson 14Rewrite each sentence. Replace the underlinedword or phrase with a pronoun.
1. Luis hugs Beth and welcomes Beth home.
2. Beth smiles at Luis and thanks Luis.
3. My sister invites Beth to play in the garden.
4. Luis goes to the garden too, and Luis plants flowers.
5. Beth finds an anthill when Beth is in the yard.
6. John makes dinner while John is in the kitchen.
7. He bakes cookies for Janet and gives them to Janet.
8. Janet eats a cookie, and Janet thanks John.
9. John is pleased because John loves to bake.
10. Janet buys John a cookbook and gives the cookbook to him.
50 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_050.indd 50RXENL08AWK31_GPB_050.indd 50 8/15/06 2:36:30 PM8/15/06 2:36:30 PM
Name
Lesson 14
Grammar–WritingConnection
Read this part of a student’s rough draft.Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) Mr. Kay lives in a house that Mr. Kay built. (2) The
house is high up in the hills, and it is far from the city.
(3) Mr. Kay likes the hills because the hills have a great view of
the city. (4) Mr. Kay’s children drive up a winding road when
she come to visit. (5) The children love their father and enjoy
visiting .
1. Which pronoun could replace the underlined words in Sentence 1?A heB sheC theyD it
2. Which pronoun could replace the underlined words in Sentence 3?A heB sheC theyD it
3. Which pronoun could go in the blank in Sentence 5?A itB themC himD her
4. Which word does the pronoun it refer to in Sentence 2?A houseB highC hillsD city
5. Which sentence has a pronoun that does not agree with the noun it refers to?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 4
6. Which pronoun could replace the underlined words in Sentence 5?A ItB ThemC TheyD He
51 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_051.indd 51RXENL08AWK31_GPB_051.indd 51 8/15/06 2:37:37 PM8/15/06 2:37:37 PM
Name Pronoun–
AntecedentAgreement
Lesson 14Circle the pronoun in each sentence. Rewritethe sentence. Correct the pronoun so that it agreeswith the underlined word.
1. The nest was too high for Maria to see him.
2. Maria was excited because he saw an owl.
3. Luke was homesick when it went to camp.
4. The girls invited Hillary to play with her .
5. John wrote a letter and sent them home.
6. John’s parents wrote back to it.
Fill in each blank with a correct pronoun. Then underline the word or words that the pronoun refers to.
7. Honeybees live in hives, where have jobs to do.
8. Worker bees feed the queen bee and protect .
9. Honeybees gather nectar and use to make honey.
10. Some people keep bees and collect honey from .
52 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_052.indd 52RXENL08AWK31_GPB_052.indd 52 8/15/06 2:47:03 PM8/15/06 2:47:03 PM
Name
Lesson 15
Grammar–WritingConnection
Read this part of a student’s rough draft.Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) Tony is the friend of Joan. (2) Tony tells Joan that he is
upset. (3) Joan asks he what is wrong. (4) Tony says that he lost his
mothers pen. (5) Joan helps him look for the pen. (6) Together they
find it under Tony’s bed.
1. Which sentence has a singular possessive noun?A Sentence 2B Sentence 3C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
2. Which sentence hasan incorrectly written possessive noun?A Sentence 2B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 6
3. Which phrase could replacethe underlined phrase in Sentence 1?A the friend’s of JoanB the friends of JoanC Joan’s friendD Joans’ friend
4. Which pronoun could replace the underlined word in Sentence 2?A heB sheC himD her
5. Which pronoun could replace the underlined phrase in Sentence 5?A itB herC himD them
6. Which sentence has an incorrect pronoun?A Sentence 3B Sentence 4C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
53 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_053.indd 53RXENL08AWK31_GPB_053.indd 53 8/15/06 2:48:37 PM8/15/06 2:48:37 PM
Name
Lesson 15
Grammar–WritingConnection
Read this part of a student’s rough draft.Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) Yasmin writes for a newspaper that she started. (2) She reports
on what is new in school. (3) Yesterday Yasmin wrote about something
that happened to her. (4) She found a kitten in the school playground.
(5) Yasmin took the kitten home and gave them to her father. (6) Her
father was happy to have the kitten.
1. Which word does the pronoun in Sentence 1 refer to?A YasminB writesC newspaperD she
2. Which sentence has a singular subject pronoun?A Sentence 2B Sentence 3C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
3. Which sentence has a singular object pronoun?A Sentence 2B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 6
4. Which sentence has a pronoun that does not agree with the noun that it refers to?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 5
5. Which could replace the underlined words in Sentence 6?A a singular subject pronounB a plural subject pronounC a singular object pronounD a plural object pronoun
6. Which pronoun could replace the words the kitten in Sentence 5?A sheB itC theyD them
54 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_054.indd 54RXENL08AWK31_GPB_054.indd 54 8/15/06 2:50:13 PM8/15/06 2:50:13 PM
Name
Lesson 16
Adjectives
Write the adjective. Then write the noun that it describes.
1. A brown bear sat in the cave.
2. The bear was hungry.
3. The forest was big.
4. The raccoon saw the purple berries.
5. The happy raccoon ate the berries.
6. A small child climbed a rock.
7. The rock was huge.
8. A plant grew in a tiny pot.
9. The plant was green.
10. The pot was round.
11. The wolf ran through the dark woods.
12. The wolf was gray.
Write two sentences that could begin a story. Use at least one adjective in each sentence. Circle each adjective, and draw an arrow to the noun it describes.
55 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_055.indd 55RXENL08AWK31_GPB_055.indd 55 8/29/06 7:36:06 PM8/29/06 7:36:06 PM
Name
Lesson 16
Adjectives
Write the adjective that tells how many.
1. Some wolves live in the forest.
2. Seven wolves run in the pack.
3. The wolf has five toes on each paw.
4. A wolf’s coat has two layers.
5. Wolves howl for several reasons.
6. The mother wolf has six babies.
Write the adjective that tells how many. Rewrite the sentence. Replace the number word with an adjective that tells how many without giving an exact number.
7. Four students wrote a story together.
8. The story was about six squirrels.
9. A woman read eleven stories to her children.
10. There were seven pictures in the book.
11. The book had ninety pages.
12. Three women waited for the bus to arrive.
56 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_056.indd 56RXENL08AWK31_GPB_056.indd 56 8/29/06 6:47:03 PM8/29/06 6:47:03 PM
Name
Lesson 16
Grammar–WritingConnection
Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) I climbed a little tree in my friend’s yard. (2) I picked cherries
from the tree. (3) I gave cherries to my father. (4) My
father had green apples at home. (5) He made a beautiful salad with
the red cherries and two green apples.
1. Which sentence has an adjective that tells how many?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
2. Which sentence has an adjective that tells what color?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 4
3. Which sentence has an adjective that tells what size?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
4. Which sentence does NOT have an adjective?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
5. Which is the BEST word to complete Sentence 3? A thinB someC unkindD big
6. Which sentence has the most adjectives?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
57 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_057.indd 57RXENL08AWK31_GPB_057.indd 57 8/29/06 6:47:42 PM8/29/06 6:47:42 PM
Name
Lesson 16
Adjectives
Underline the two adjectives in each sentence. Then write whether each adjective tells what kind or how many.
1. Many wolves eat five pounds of food a day.
2. A few wolves have blue eyes.
3. The coats of some wolves are white.
4. Big wolves weigh more than ninety pounds.
Rewrite the sentences. Add an adjective before each underlined noun. Use an adjective that answers the question in parentheses ( ).
5. The apple fell from the tree. (What color?)
6. There were apples on the tree. (How many?)
7. Fatima ate the apple. (What size?)
8. I cut the apple into slices. (What shape?)
58 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_058.indd 58RXENL08AWK31_GPB_058.indd 58 8/29/06 6:48:28 PM8/29/06 6:48:28 PM
Name Adjectives That Compare
Lesson 17Rewrite each sentence. Use the correct form of the adjective in parentheses ( ).
1. The lion is (large) than the fox.
2. The peacock has the (pretty) feathers of all the birds.
3. The bear is the (strong) animal in the forest.
4. The beetle is (tiny) than the worm.
5. The horse runs (fast) than the donkey.
6. That dog has the (loud) bark in town.
7. Sabrina’s rabbit is (fluffy) than my rabbit.
8. The dolphin is the (smart) of all the ocean animals.
9. The cat is (friendly) today than it was yesterday.
10. We have the (cute) pet on the block.
59 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_059.indd 59RXENL08AWK31_GPB_059.indd 59 8/29/06 7:21:21 PM8/29/06 7:21:21 PM
Name Adjectives That Compare
Lesson 17Rewrite each sentence. Use more or the most correctly before each adjective.
1. These berries are delicious than those berries.
2. The cherry tree is beautiful of the three trees.
3. This hike is difficult than the last hike.
4. A hurricane is frightening than a rainstorm.
5. Thunder makes terrifying sound of all.
6. This is wonderful sunrise that I have ever seen.
7. The hawk is powerful bird in the forest.
8. This lake has unusual fish in the state.
9. This forest is enormous than the Black Hills National Forest.
10. This story is interesting one I have ever read.
60 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_060.indd 60RXENL08AWK31_GPB_060.indd 60 8/29/06 7:22:21 PM8/29/06 7:22:21 PM
Name
Lesson 17Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) My brother is older than I am. (2) He took me camping in a big
forest last weekend. (3) The forest was the beautiful place that I have
ever visited. (4) The trees were tall than my house. (5) In the morning
we saw a brown bear. (6) I was scared than my brother, and my scream
was than his!
1. Which sentence has the correct form of an adjective that compares?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 4
2. Which adjective needs the ending -er?A beautiful (Sentence 3)B tall (Sentence 4)C brown (Sentence 5)D scared (Sentence 6)
3. Which adjective needs the word more before it?A older (Sentence 1)B big (Sentence 2)C beautiful (Sentence 3)D scared (Sentence 6)
4. Which adjective needs the word most before it?A older (Sentence 1)B beautiful (Sentence 3)C brown (Sentence 5)D scared (Sentence 6)
5. Which are the correct adjectives that compare for the adjective big in Sentence 2?A bigger, biggestB big, biggestC more big, most bigD more bigger, most biggest
6. Which is the BEST way to complete Sentence 6?A more loudB most loud C louderD loudest
Grammar–Writing Connection
61 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_061.indd 61RXENL08AWK31_GPB_061.indd 61 8/29/06 6:49:15 PM8/29/06 6:49:15 PM
Name Adjectives That Compare
Lesson 17Write the form of each adjective that compares two things. Then write the form that compares three or more things.
1. playful
2. funny
3. afraid
4. important
5. high
6. exciting
Rewrite each sentence correctly.
7. The raccoon was small than the fox.
8. Today’s sunset was lovely than yesterday’s sunset.
9. That cliff was the most steep one I have ever climbed.
10. The river was more deeper than the stream.
62 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_062.indd 62RXENL08AWK31_GPB_062.indd 62 8/29/06 6:50:15 PM8/29/06 6:50:15 PM
Name Articles
Lesson 18Write the article in each sentence and the noun it introduces.
1. Angela went to the city.
2. She visited a friend.
3. Angela’s friend lived in an apartment.
4. They took the bus.
5. They went to a museum.
6. They saw a painting.
7. It had a frame.
8. Children played in the grass.
9. A bird ate pieces of bread.
10. The man played his violin.
11. The friends went home.
12. They took a train.
Find four sentences that use articles in a book or a magazine. Copy the sentences. Circle the articles. Draw an arrow from each article to the noun it introduces.
63 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_063.indd 63RXENL08AWK31_GPB_063.indd 63 8/29/06 6:50:45 PM8/29/06 6:50:45 PM
Name Articles
Lesson 18Rewrite each sentence. Use a or an to fill in the blank.
1. Jessie’s older sister is artist.
2. She is making clay sculpture.
3. Jeff buys paper and box of paints.
4. He draws some squares and oval.
Rewrite each sentence. Use a, an, or the to fill in the blank.
5. Several paintings hang on white walls.
6. Abe is excellent painter.
7. This is biggest museum.
8. You need some paper and pencil for drawing.
9. young artists will have an art show.
64 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_064.indd 64RXENL08AWK31_GPB_064.indd 64 8/29/06 6:51:34 PM8/29/06 6:51:34 PM
Name
Lesson 18
Grammar–WritingConnection
Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) My aunt lives in house in the country. I visited her last
weekend. (2) On Saturday we saw a owl. (3) owl was in a tree.
(4) On Sunday we rode a tractor and picked apples. (5) My aunt
made baked apples that night. (6) apples were delicious.
1. Which of these sentences has an article that is used correctly?A Sentence 2B Sentence 4C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
2. In which sentence should the article a be changed to an?A Sentence 2B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 6
3. Which word should fill in the blank in Sentence 6?A AB AnC TheD One
4. Which word would BEST fill in the blank in Sentence 1?A aB anC theD several
5. Which word would BEST fill in the blank in Sentence 3?A AB AnC TheD Some
6. Which sentence does NOT have an article?A Sentence 1B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
65 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_065.indd 65RXENL08AWK31_GPB_065.indd 65 8/29/06 7:22:59 PM8/29/06 7:22:59 PM
Name Articles
Lesson 18Use the articles a, an, and the to write two singular forms of each plural noun.
Examples: birds: a bird, the bird
icy roads: an icy road, the icy road
1. skyscrapers
2. elevators
3. rooftops
4. noisy trains
5. escalators
6. shops
7. airports
8. excited boys
9. red cars
Write a sentence for each article. Circle the article, and underline the noun that it introduces.
10. a
11. an
12. the
66 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_066.indd 66RXENL08AWK31_GPB_066.indd 66 8/29/06 6:52:30 PM8/29/06 6:52:30 PM
Name Action Verbs
Lesson 19Write the complete predicate of each sentence. Underline the action verb.
1. The woman walks to the market.
2. She buys fruit and vegetables.
3. The animals gather in the yard.
4. The cows moo at the ducks.
5. The sun shines brightly.
6. The weather reporter predicts rain.
7. The boy helps his sister.
8. The children eat a good meal.
9. I enjoy the folktale.
10. We discuss the characters.
67 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_067.indd 67RXENL08AWK31_GPB_067.indd 67 8/29/06 6:53:36 PM8/29/06 6:53:36 PM
68
Name Action Verbs
Lesson 19Underline the correct action verb in each sentence.
1. The chicken (lay/lays) five eggs.
2. Ava (watch/watches) the little chicks.
3. I (plant/plants) corn and tomatoes.
4. He (plow/plows) the field.
5. Children (play/plays) near the barn.
6. We (sell/sells) milk and cheese.
7. The dog (bark/barks) loudly.
Choose an action verb from the box to complete each sentence. Then write the sentence.
8. The chickens in the dirt.
9. The rooster everyone.
10. We a basket of eggs.
11. Tyrell eggs to the market.
12. She feed around the yard.
takes carry wakes scratch scatters
Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_068.indd 68RXENL08AWK31_GPB_068.indd 68 8/29/06 7:25:13 PM8/29/06 7:25:13 PM
Name
Lesson 19
Grammar–Writing Connection
Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) Rosa lives in Mexico City. (2) She soccer. (3) She
and her father watch games together on TV. (4) One Sunday they rides
a bus to a game at a stadium. (5) The home team wins. (6) The excited
fans stand and cheer.
1. Which is the verb in Sentence 1?A RosaB livesC inD Mexico
2. Which of these action verbs does not agree with its subject?A watch (Sentence 3)B rides (Sentence 4)C wins (Sentence 5)D stand (Sentence 6)
3. Which sentence has a singular subject and a verb that agrees?A Sentence 2B Sentence 3C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
4. Which action verb could complete Sentence 2?A likeB enjoyC lovesD play
5. Which sentence has two action verbs?A Sentence 3B Sentence 4C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
6. Which sentence has a plural subject and a verb that agrees?A Sentence 1B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
69 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_069.indd 69RXENL08AWK31_GPB_069.indd 69 8/29/06 7:26:17 PM8/29/06 7:26:17 PM
Name Action Verbs
Lesson 19Rewrite each sentence. Use the correct form of the verb in parentheses ( ).
1. An egg (hatch/hatches) in the nest.
2. The ducklings (follow/follows) their mother.
3. The farmer (hurry/hurries) home.
4. Mice (scurry/scurries) around the barn.
5. We (milk/milks) the cows every morning.
6. She (drive/drives) the big tractor.
7. Jessica (help/helps) my brother dry dishes.
8. They (clean/cleans) the kitchen.
Grammar Practice Book70
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_070.indd 70RXENL08AWK31_GPB_070.indd 70 8/29/06 6:55:03 PM8/29/06 6:55:03 PM
Name
Lesson 20Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) There was an art show at the library yesterday. (2) Children
displayed their art. (3) I showed two paintings. (4) They were the
largest ones in the room. (5) There were also photographs
and a black sculpture. (6) The sculpture was interesting than the
photographs.
1. Which sentence uses the correct form of an adjective that compares?A Sentence 3B Sentence 4C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
2. Which adjective needs the word more before it?A two (Sentence 3)B largest (Sentence 4)C black (Sentence 5)D interesting (Sentence 6)
3. Which adjective could be written before Children in Sentence 2?A ManyB OneC HundredD Each
4. Which adjective that tells what kind could fill in the blank in Sentence 5?A biggestB tiniestC smallD some
5. Which sentence has an adjective that tells what color?A Sentence 1B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
6. Which of these sentences does NOT have an adjective?A Sentence 2B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
Grammar–WritingConnection
71 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_071.indd 71RXENL08AWK31_GPB_071.indd 71 8/29/06 6:55:58 PM8/29/06 6:55:58 PM
Name
Lesson 20
Grammar–WritingConnection
Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) Luke interviews his mother for a newsletter at school. (2) He
asks his mother questions and writes down a answers. (3)
questions are about his mother’s job. (4) Luke’s mother is a engineer.
(5) She plans bridges, and people builds them. (6) Students enjoy the
report that Luke writes.
1. In which sentence should the article be changed to an?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 4D Sentence 6
2. Which word could fill in the blank in Sentence 3?A AB AnC TheD Writes
3. Which sentence has a plural noun with an article that does NOT agree?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 4D Sentence 6
4. Which of these action verbs does NOT agree with its subject?A interviews (Sentence 1)B writes (Sentence 2)C plans (Sentence 5)D builds (Sentence 5)
5. Which sentence has only one action verb?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
6. Which sentence has a plural subject and an action verb that agrees?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 4D Sentence 6
72 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_072.indd 72RXENL08AWK31_GPB_072.indd 72 8/29/06 7:27:01 PM8/29/06 7:27:01 PM
Name The Verb Be
Lesson 21Write the form of the verb be in each sentence.
1. Laura is cold without her hat.
2. The winter was long.
3. The gloves are on the chair.
4. I am warmer now.
5. The girls were at home.
6. Julio is with Laura.
7. The children are at the skating rink.
8. Those boys were good skaters.
9. The lake is frozen this morning.
10. The grass is covered with snow.
11. I am tired at the end of the day.
12. A huge snowball is next to the house.
13. It is the beginning of a snowman.
14. We were excited to begin.
15. I am freezing outside.
Write four sentences about your classroom, using the verb be. Use a singular subject in two sentences and a plural subject in the other two. Underline the forms of the verb be.
73 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_073.indd 73RXENL08AWK31_GPB_073.indd 73 8/29/06 6:56:40 PM8/29/06 6:56:40 PM
Name The Verb Be
Lesson 21Rewrite each sentence. Choose the correct form of the verb be in parentheses ( ).
1. It (is, are) summer.
2. I (is, am) at the ocean.
3. We (was, were) warm in the sun.
4. He (is, am) in the water.
5. They (was, were) with their friends.
6. You (is, are) on a beach blanket.
7. I (was, are) at the snack bar.
8. It (is, are) next to a playground.
9. They (is, are) on the swings.
10. She (is, are) sleepy at the end of the day.
74 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_074.indd 74RXENL08AWK31_GPB_074.indd 74 8/29/06 7:28:12 PM8/29/06 7:28:12 PM
Name
Lesson 21Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) My friends and I are at a park. (2) We is very happy.
(3) Flowers are everywhere. (4) A squirrel in a tree.
(5) I smile at it. (6) Spring are my favorite season.
1. Which sentence has a form of the verb be that does NOT agree with the subject?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 5
2. Which does NOT have a form of the verb be?A Sentence 1B Sentence 3C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
3. Which could go in the blank in Sentence 4?A amB isC areD were
4. How should the form of the verb be in Sentence 6 be written?A amB areC wereD is
5. Which has a form of the verb be that links the subject to words that tell what?A Sentence 1B Sentence 3C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
6. Which has a form of the verb be that links the subject to words that tell where?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
Grammar–WritingConnection
75 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_075.indd 75RXENL08AWK31_GPB_075.indd 75 8/29/06 6:57:18 PM8/29/06 6:57:18 PM
Name The Verb Be
Lesson 21Circle the form of the verb be in each sentence. Then write whether each links the subject to words that tell what or where.
1. Some seals are white.
2. The penguin chick was fuzzy.
3. You were on the shore.
4. That shark is near a whale.
5. I am with my parents.
6. They are scientists.
Rewrite each sentence, using a correct form of the verb be. Then write S above each singular subject and P above each plural subject.
7. Those fish small and silver.
8. We close to the beaver’s dam.
9. He in a wooden boat.
10. The river full of life.
76 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_076.indd 76RXENL08AWK31_GPB_076.indd 76 8/29/06 6:58:35 PM8/29/06 6:58:35 PM
Name Main and Helping Verbs
Lesson 22Circle the helping verb and underline the main verb in each sentence.
1. Some butterflies can fly long distances.
2. Moths are attracted to the light.
3. The mosquito could bite you!
4. We have seen many insects this summer.
5. She will study bees at the library.
6. I am writing a report on ladybugs.
7. The bats were looking for food.
8. You should watch that hummingbird.
9. The ducks had flown south for the winter.
10. An eagle is gliding through the sky.
11. The hawk has spotted a mouse.
12. A parrot may live for 80 years.
Write four sentences about your day at school, using main and helping verbs. Circle the helping verbs. Underline the main verbs.
77 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_077.indd 77RXENL08AWK31_GPB_077.indd 77 8/29/06 6:59:29 PM8/29/06 6:59:29 PM
Name Main and Helping Verbs
Lesson 22Circle the helping verbs, and underline the main verbs.
1. I did not watch the sunset.
2. We will now change into pajamas.
3. I could not see the moon.
4. It was hidden behind a cloud.
5. They would not go to bed.
6. The baby has never slept through the night.
7. The dogs were already sleeping.
8. Stars are shining in the sky.
Rewrite each sentence, using a helping verb from the box.
9. Moths fly up to 25 miles per hour.
10. That moth not have spots on its wings.
11. The butterfly walking on a leaf.
12. Those butterflies gone to Mexico for the winter.
is does can have
78 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_078.indd 78RXENL08AWK31_GPB_078.indd 78 8/29/06 7:00:35 PM8/29/06 7:00:35 PM
Name
Lesson 22Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) In her dreams, Mandy can fly. (2) She gliding over
the city at night. (3) The sun have set. (4) It will soon become
dark. (5) Mandy loves her dream. (6) She will forget it.
1. Which has a helping verb that does NOT agree with the subject?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 4
2. Which has a main verb and a helping verb used correctly?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 5
3. The word not should follow the helping verb in Sentence 6. Where should it go?A after She B after will C after forget D after it
4. In which sentence should the helping verb is go before the main verb?A Sentence 2B Sentence 4C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
5. Which does NOT have a helping verb?A Sentence 1B Sentence 4C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
6. Which are the main and helping verbs in Sentence 4?A will and soonB will and becomeC soon and becomeD become and dark
Grammar–WritingConnection
79 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_079.indd 79RXENL08AWK31_GPB_079.indd 79 8/29/06 7:01:04 PM8/29/06 7:01:04 PM
Name Main and Helping Verbs
Lesson 22Rewrite the sentences. Add a helping verb to each one.
1. I never studied mammals.
2. We learn about bats.
3. We go to the library.
4. Butterflies see red, yellow, and green.
5. A butterfly landed on that leaf.
6. That butterfly laid 400 eggs.
7. Butterflies fly only when they are warm.
8. The librarian found a great book about butterflies.
80 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_080.indd 80RXENL08AWK31_GPB_080.indd 80 8/29/06 7:02:16 PM8/29/06 7:02:16 PM
Name Present-TenseVerbs
Lesson 23Rewrite each sentence. Use the correct present-tense form of the verb in parentheses ( ).
1. I (help) my family.
2. My sister (plant) carrot seeds.
3. We (work) together in the garden.
4. My brother (pick) tomatoes.
5. My mother (carry) them inside.
6. My father (wash) the tomatoes.
7. He (slice) them into small pieces.
8. I (make) a salad for dinner.
9. A friend (eat) with us.
10. She (enjoy) the salad.
81 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_081.indd 81RXENL08AWK31_GPB_081.indd 81 8/29/06 7:03:22 PM8/29/06 7:03:22 PM
Name Present-TenseVerbs
Lesson 23Write the verb in each sentence. Then write S if the subject is singular or P if the subject is plural.
1. We plan a picnic.
2. I make sandwiches.
3. A dish breaks.
4. Lila fixes it with glue.
5. The children eat under a tree.
6. Teresa hears thunder.
7. They put the food away.
8. She runs home.
Rewrite each sentence. Use the correct present-tense form of the verb in parentheses ( ).
9. Leah (like) this book.
10. The prince (marry) the princess.
11. He (write) a fairy tale.
12. We (enjoy) the story.
82 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_082.indd 82RXENL08AWK31_GPB_082.indd 82 8/29/06 7:04:09 PM8/29/06 7:04:09 PM
Name
Lesson 23
(1) My father and I make a cake for my brother’s birthday.
(2) I mix the ingredients. (3) My father bake the cake in the
oven. (4) We ices it together. (5) My brother the cake
at his party. (6) loves it.
Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
1. Which sentence has a singular subject and a correct present-tense verb?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 4
2. Which sentence has a singular subject and an incorrect present-tense verb? A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 4
3. Which sentence has a plural subject and a correct present-tense verb?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 4
4. Which sentence has a plural subject and an incorrect present-tense verb?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 4
5. Which is a present-tense verb that could fill in the blank in Sentence 5?A eatingB eatC eatsD ate
6. Which subject could fill in the blank in Sentence 6?A HeB WeC He and his friendsD My brother’s friends
Grammar–WritingConnection
83 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_083.indd 83RXENL08AWK31_GPB_083.indd 83 8/29/06 7:04:45 PM8/29/06 7:04:45 PM
Name Present-TenseVerbs
Lesson 23Rewrite each sentence correctly, using the subject in parentheses ( ). Be sure that the verb in your sentence agrees with its new subject.
Example: Glenda likes math. (My brothers)
1. I enter a writing contest. (George)
2. The teachers judge the contest. (A teacher)
3. One student wins the contest. (Two students)
4. We like stories about animals. (You)
5. She prefers true stories. (He)
6. The princesses meet a prince. (The princess)
7. We hurry home from school. (They)
8. Our mother opens the front door. (We)
My brothers like math.
84 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_084.indd 84RXENL08AWK31_GPB_084.indd 84 8/29/06 7:06:33 PM8/29/06 7:06:33 PM
Name Past-Tense and Future-Tense Verbs
Lesson 24Write the verb in each sentence. Then label it as present, past, or future tense.
1. Jen finishes her homework quickly.
2. Simon will write an essay next week.
3. The teacher assigned five math problems.
4. You carried a dictionary to school.
5. Students will read their reports aloud.
6. Jason draws a picture in art class.
7. We tried the science experiment at home.
8. The children named three kinds of plants.
9. My sister learns Spanish in high school.
10. I will ask my mother for help.
85 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_085.indd 85RXENL08AWK31_GPB_085.indd 85 8/29/06 7:07:36 PM8/29/06 7:07:36 PM
Name Past-Tense and Future-Tense Verbs
Lesson 24Rewrite each sentence. Use the future-tense form of the verb in parentheses ( ).
1. Yolanda (stay) home from school today.
2. She (go) to the doctor later.
3. The doctor (give) her some medicine.
4. She (feel) much better tomorrow.
Write a sentence that uses the future-tense form of the verb.
5. run
6. play
7. hurry
8. watch
86 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_086.indd 86RXENL08AWK31_GPB_086.indd 86 8/29/06 7:08:40 PM8/29/06 7:08:40 PM
Name
Lesson 24Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) Paul all week for today’s math test. (2) Soon
he take the test. (3) He clears his desk. (4) His teacher hands
him the test sheet. (5) She smiles and says “Good luck.” (6) Paul
worked hard, and he will do well on the test.
1. Which verb form BEST completes Sentence 1?A studyB will studyC studiedD studies
2. Which verb needs the helping verb will to make it a correct future-tense verb?A take (Sentence 2)B clears (Sentence 3)C smiles (Sentence 5)D worked (Sentence 6)
3. Which sentence does NOT have a present-tense verb?A Sentence 3B Sentence 4C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
4. Which sentence has two correct present-tense verbs?A Sentence 3B Sentence 4C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
5. Which sentence has a correct past-tense verb?A Sentence 2B Sentence 3C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
6. Which sentence has a correct future-tense verb?A Sentence 3B Sentence 4C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
Grammar–WritingConnection
87 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_087.indd 87RXENL08AWK31_GPB_087.indd 87 8/29/06 7:09:03 PM8/29/06 7:09:03 PM
Name Past-Tense and Future-Tense Verbs
Lesson 24Underline the verb in each sentence. Then rewrite the sentence in the tense shownin parentheses ( ).
1. The children study quietly. (past)
2. The teacher will talk about the report. (past)
3. Many students enjoyed music class. (present)
4. Mr. Green scores the test. (future)
5. Tim will hurry to school. (present)
6. We play outside during recess. (past)
7. You solved the math problem. (future)
8. Misha practices the flute. (past)
88 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_088.indd 88RXENL08AWK31_GPB_088.indd 88 8/29/06 7:10:12 PM8/29/06 7:10:12 PM
Name
Lesson 25
Grammar–WritingConnection
Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) Mia and Simon writing a story. (2) The story are about a robot.
(3) The robot is funny. (4) It say all sorts of things. (5) The
children are excited. (6) They will show the story to their teacher.
1. Which sentence has a singular subject and the correct form of the verb be?A Sentence 2B Sentence 3C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
2. Which sentence has a plural subject and the correct form of the verb be?A Sentence 2B Sentence 3C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
3. Which sentence has a form of the verb be that does not agree with the subject?A Sentence 2B Sentence 3C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
4. Which helping verb should go before the main verb in Sentence 1?A haveB willC canD are
5. Which helping verb could complete Sentence 4?A haveB hadC canD is
6. Which other helping verb could replace will in Sentence 6?A hadB canC haveD were
89 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_089.indd 89RXENL08AWK31_GPB_089.indd 89 8/29/06 7:29:00 PM8/29/06 7:29:00 PM
Name
Lesson 25
Grammar–WritingConnection
Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) William loves space. (2) He looked at pictures of the sun
and moon when he was younger. (3) Now he read books about
the solar system. (4) He will learn about the planets. (5) He will
studies space travel. (6) One day he will become an astronaut.
1. Which sentence has a correct past-tense verb?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
2. Which sentence has a correct present-tense verb?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 4
3. Which sentence has an incorrect form of a future-tense verb?A Sentence 2B Sentence 4C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
4. Which verb should end with an s?A looked (Sentence 2)B read (Sentence 3)C learn (Sentence 4)D become (Sentence 6)
5. Which is the future-tense form of the verb in Sentence 1?A loveB will loveC will lovesD loved
6. Which is the past-tense form of the verb in Sentence 4?A learnB learnsC can learnD learned
90 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_090.indd 90RXENL08AWK31_GPB_090.indd 90 8/29/06 7:10:52 PM8/29/06 7:10:52 PM
Name Irregular Verbs
Lesson 26Rewrite each sentence. Use the verb and tense shown in parentheses ( ).
1. I a spider yesterday. (see—past tense)
2. The spider home to its web. (go—past tense)
3. Shondra a pet spider. (have—past tense)
4. Zack that he likes spiders. (say—present tense)
5. A spider several things to catch insects. (do—present tense)
6. A fly to the spider’s web. (come—present tense)
7. That spider (have—present tense) a sticky web.
8. The spider (do—past tense) its work quickly.
91 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_091.indd 91RXENL08AWK31_GPB_091.indd 91 8/29/06 7:11:53 PM8/29/06 7:11:53 PM
Name Irregular Verbs
Lesson 26Rewrite each sentence, using the correct present-tense verb in parentheses ( ).
1. The tired pig (lies, lays) in the grass.
2. The sun (rises, raises) over the field.
3. The farmer (sits, sets) her bucket on a stool.
4. He (lies, lays) a blanket over the horse.
5. We (sit, set) together under an apple tree.
Rewrite each sentence. Use the past-tense form of the verb shown in parentheses ( ).
6. Gwen in the sun all afternoon. (lie)
7. The children early for school. (rise)
8. You the eggs on the table. (set)
9. The hen many eggs. (lay)
92 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_092.indd 92RXENL08AWK31_GPB_092.indd 92 8/29/06 7:12:54 PM8/29/06 7:12:54 PM
Name Grammar–WritingConnection
Lesson 26Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) The sun risen, and it was a beautiful morning. (2) Nathan
in the grass. (3) He watched as three deer came to the river.
(4) Nathan saw the deer drink. (5) He say nothing, because he did not
want to scare them. (6) When the deer had finished drinking, Nathan
to his feet and walked quietly home.
1. Which verb form could go in the blank in Sentence 2?A laysB laidC lainD lay
2. Which is the present-tense form of the verb saw in Sentence 4?A did seenB had seenC had seeD sees
3. Which is a correct past-tense verb to replace the underlined verb in Sentence 5?A saysB sayedC saidD saying
4. Which verb needs the helping verb had before it?A risen (Sentence 1)B saw (Sentence 4)C drink (Sentence 4)D scare (Sentence 5)
5. Which are the present-tense forms of the verbs in Sentence 3?A watches, comeB did watch, had comeC had watched, had comeD will watch, will come
6. Which verb form could go in the blank in Sentence 6?A riseB roseC raiseD raised
93 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_093.indd 93RXENL08AWK31_GPB_093.indd 93 8/29/06 7:13:11 PM8/29/06 7:13:11 PM
Name Irregular Verbs
Lesson 26Rewrite each sentence, using the verb tense in parentheses ( ).
1. The spider laid eggs. (present tense)
2. I have two books on spiders. (past tense)
3. The farmer’s daughter had done her chores. (present tense)
4. She sits at the kitchen table. (past tense)
5. Her brother comes home from school. (past tense)
6. He will say “giddyup” to the horse. (past tense)
7. The neighbors raised their new flag. (present tense)
8. We saw many animals on the farm. (present tense)
94 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_094.indd 94RXENL08AWK31_GPB_094.indd 94 8/29/06 7:14:23 PM8/29/06 7:14:23 PM
Name Adverbs
Lesson 27Write the adverb in each sentence. Then write whether it tells how, where, or when.
1. Ants work together in colonies.
2. We saw an ant hill outside.
3. I observed ants earlier.
4. You touched one ant gently.
5. Soon the ants will dig a nest.
6. Some ants left a trail here.
7. The big ant moves slowly.
8. Wow, those ants go everywhere!
9. The ants carefully carry a bread crumb.
10. Worker ants always care for their queen.
11. Now the ants walk in a line.
12. Those ants live underground.
Write three sentences about your day at school. Use an adverb in each sentence. One adverb should tell how, one should tell where, and one should tell when.
95 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_095.indd 95RXENL08AWK31_GPB_095.indd 95 8/29/06 7:14:44 PM8/29/06 7:14:44 PM
Name Adverbs
Lesson 27Rewrite each sentence. Use the correct comparative form of the adverb in parentheses ( ).
1. This ant works (hard) than that ant.
2. Which butterfly flies the (low)?
3. The shark swims (fast) than the fish.
4. That dolphin jumps the (high) of all.
5. These birds will fly south (soon) than those birds.
Rewrite each sentence. Add more or the most before the adverb.
6. The nightingale sings beautifully of all the birds.
7. A tiger moves silently than an elephant.
8. The horse drinks often than the camel.
9. My dog wags its tail happily of all.
96 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_096.indd 96RXENL08AWK31_GPB_096.indd 96 8/29/06 7:15:35 PM8/29/06 7:15:35 PM
Name
Lesson 27Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) I like science, and I work hard. (2) Yesterday I read about
spiders. (3) Today I studied the planets. (4) I learned that Earth
spins than Mercury. (5) I also learned that Mercury
moves around the sun the of all the planets. (6) I will
visit a science museum soon, and I will learn more there.
1. Which word does the adverb in Sentence 1 describe?A IB likeC scienceD work
2. Which sentence has an adverb that tells how?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 6
3. Which sentence has an adverb that tells where?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 6
4. Which sentence does NOT have an adverb that tells when?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 6
5. Which form of an adverb could go in the blank in Sentence 4?A fastB faster C more fasterD fastest
6. Which form of an adverb could go in the blank in Sentence 5?A quick B quicklyC most quickly D more quickly
Grammar–WritingConnection
97 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_097.indd 97RXENL08AWK31_GPB_097.indd 97 8/29/06 7:15:55 PM8/29/06 7:15:55 PM
Name Adverbs
Lesson 27Write the adverb in each sentence. Then write the verb that it describes.
1. My teacher talks excitedly about science.
2. Tomorrow we will learn about insects.
3. Of all the students, Evan studied the longest.
4. I speak more softly than the other students at the library.
Rewrite each sentence. Complete it with an adverb that answers the question in parentheses ( ).
5. This spider crawls than that spider. (How?)
6. I put my report . (Where?)
7. you will learn about the sun. (When?)
98 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_098.indd 98RXENL08AWK31_GPB_098.indd 98 8/29/06 7:17:08 PM8/29/06 7:17:08 PM
Name Contractions
Lesson 28Rewrite each sentence. Replace the underlined words with a contraction.
1. It is an exciting day.
2. I am going to be in a baking contest.
3. Some children did not know about the contest.
4. You are bringing two pies.
5. My brothers are not baking anything.
6. They had not entered the contest.
7. The judges were not in the room.
8. They are eager to taste my cookies.
9. My father could not come to the contest.
10. We should not eat too much cake.
99 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_099.indd 99RXENL08AWK31_GPB_099.indd 99 8/29/06 7:30:02 PM8/29/06 7:30:02 PM
Name Contractions
Lesson 28Rewrite each sentence, using the correct word(s) in parentheses ( ).
1. You hadn’t (ever, never) told me about volcanoes.
2. I don’t know (nothing, anything) about them.
3. My brother hasn’t won (any, no) science prizes yet.
4. My sister doesn’t have (none, any) either.
5. We haven’t told (anybody, nobody) about the contest.
6. Laurie wouldn’t tell her friends (neither, either).
7. Carlos won’t go (anywhere, nowhere) without a notebook.
8. Isn’t (no one, anyone) in the classroom?
9. Those children never enter (any, no) contests.
10. No one said (nothing, anything) about cleaning up.
100 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_100.indd 100RXENL08AWK31_GPB_100.indd 100 8/29/06 7:18:26 PM8/29/06 7:18:26 PM
Name
Lesson 28Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) Maria is not going to give up! (2) She is making an electric
buzzer for her science project. (3) She has not ever made one before, but
her teacher showed her how. (4) Now Maria doesn’t even need no help.
(5) Maria’s teacher smiles at her. (6) glad that she’s in his class.
1. Which sentence has a contraction that is formed with a pronoun?A Sentence 2B Sentence 4C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
2. Which sentence has a contraction that is formed with the word not?A Sentence 1B Sentence 4C Sentence 5D Sentence 6
3. Which sentence does NOT have two words that could form a contraction?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 5
4. In which sentence could you form a contraction that includes a subject pronoun?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
5. Which is a correct contraction that could go in the blank in Sentence 6?A He’sB Hes’C He’dD He’re
6. Which sentence has an error in it?A Sentence 2B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
Grammar–WritingConnection
101 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_101.indd 101RXENL08AWK31_GPB_101.indd 101 9/18/06 6:28:07 PM9/18/06 6:28:07 PM
Name Contractions
Lesson 28Rewrite each sentence. Replace each contraction with the words used to form it.
1. Alice doesn’t see that we’re waving.
2. She’s worried that we haven’t arrived.
3. I’m glad that you didn’t stay home.
4. It isn’t clear that he’s the winner.
If the sentence is correct, write correct. If it is not, rewrite it correctly.
5. Wouldn’t you like any help?
6. I don’t see my teacher nowhere.
7. There wasn’t nobody in the cafeteria.
102 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_102.indd 102RXENL08AWK31_GPB_102.indd 102 8/29/06 7:19:59 PM8/29/06 7:19:59 PM
Name Punctuation
Lesson 29Rewrite each sentence. Use capital letters and commas correctly.
1. my father my sister and i watch the stars every night.
2. we sit outside in june july and august.
3. there is a telescope at school and i can use it.
4. mrs. morgan helps us point the telescope toward mars.
5. on monday we look at jupiter but on tuesday we look at saturn.
6. the sky is bright with fireworks on independence day.
7. i lie in the grass close my eyes and listen.
8. karen learns about the planets at lincoln elementary school.
9. she reads books looks at pictures and asks questions.
10. students can watch a short movie or they can read quietly.
Grammar Practice Book103
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_103.indd 103RXENL08AWK31_GPB_103.indd 103 8/29/06 7:30:39 PM8/29/06 7:30:39 PM
Name Punctuation
Lesson 29Rewrite each title correctly. The words in parentheses ( ) tell what kind of title each one is.
1. Charlie and the Chocolate Factory (book)
2. In Which Piglet Is Entirely Surrounded by Water (chapter from a book)
3. Hickory, Dickory, Dock (song)
4. Ranger Rick (magazine)
5. Lake Country Gazette (newspaper)
Rewrite each sentence. Write titles correctly.
6. Have you read the book Little House on the Prairie?
7. My little sister likes the song Three Blind Mice.
8. Robert Louis Stevenson wrote a poem called The Lamplighter.
9. Students Speak is a column in our school newspaper.
Grammar Practice Book104
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_104.indd 104RXENL08AWK31_GPB_104.indd 104 8/29/06 7:31:45 PM8/29/06 7:31:45 PM
Name
Lesson 29
Grammar–WritingConnection
Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) Mr. mercado is my neighbor and he knows a lot about the
stars. (2) he gave me a book called find the constellations. (3) My
brother my best friend and i read the book together. (4) We learned
that there is a group of stars named Ursa Major. (5) they are supposed
to look like a bear but they just look like pretty stars to me.
1. Which sentence is NOT missing one or more commas?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 5
2. Which sentence needs two commas?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 5
3. Which sentence has a proper noun that should be capitalized?A Sentence 1B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
4. Which sentence does NOT have a pronoun that should be capitalized?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 5
5. Which sentence has a title that should be capitalized and underlined?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 4
6. Which sentence has a correct proper noun?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 4
Grammar Practice Book105
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_105.indd 105RXENL08AWK31_GPB_105.indd 105 8/29/06 7:32:37 PM8/29/06 7:32:37 PM
Name Punctuation
Lesson 29Rewrite each sentence correctly.
1. sometimes i sing my favorite song.
2. that song is called twinkle, twinkle, little star.
3. those three stars are named altair castor and polaris.
4. sirius is the brightest star in the sky and i see it at night.
5. you can read about stars in a magazine called Ask.
6. mrs. wong reads to children at the library in middletown.
7. she lives in new york but she works in connecticut.
8. today she reads the book a child’s introduction to the night sky.
Grammar Practice Book106
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_106.indd 106RXENL08AWK31_GPB_106.indd 106 8/29/06 7:33:26 PM8/29/06 7:33:26 PM
Name
Lesson 30Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) Yesterday my class went to an animal park. (2) We saw lions
from the window of the school bus. (3) One lion on a rock.
(4) Monkeys played happily in the trees. (5) Some of them come excitedly
to the bus. (6) , I will write a story about all the animals I seen.
1. Which of these verb forms could go in the blank in Sentence 3?A sitB setsC satD set
2. Which verb needs the helping verb have before it?A went (Sentence 1)B saw (Sentence 2)C write (Sentence 6)D seen (Sentence 6)
3. Which is the past-tense form that could replace the underlined verb in Sentence 5?A comesB comedC came D camed
4. Which sentence has an adverb that tells when?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
5. Which sentence does NOT have an adverb?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
6. Which adverb could go in the blank in Sentence 6?A TomorrowB More quicklyC Most slowlyD More slow
Grammar–WritingConnection
107 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_107.indd 107RXENL08AWK31_GPB_107.indd 107 8/29/06 7:34:42 PM8/29/06 7:34:42 PM
Name
Lesson 30
Grammar–WritingConnection
Read this part of a student’s rough draft. Then answer the questions that follow.
(1) Latisha, Latisha’s father and his friend went to Tonto
National Forest in Arizona. (2) They stay long but they
had a great time. (3) They camped, hiked and swam on friday.
(4) On Saturday night they sang a song around the campfire
called “Make New Friends.” (5) Latisha didn’t never want to leave
the forest.
1. Which sentence has a contraction?A Sentence 1B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
2. Which contraction could go in the blank in Sentence 2?A doesn’tB aren’tC couldn’tD they’re
3. Which sentence has a double negative that needs to be corrected?A Sentence 1B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
4. Which of these sentences does NOT need a comma added?A Sentence 1B Sentence 2C Sentence 3D Sentence 5
5. Which of these sentences has a proper noun that is incorrect?A Sentence 1B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
6. Which sentence is correct?A Sentence 1B Sentence 3C Sentence 4D Sentence 5
108 Grammar Practice Book
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_108.indd 108RXENL08AWK31_GPB_108.indd 108 8/29/06 7:35:37 PM8/29/06 7:35:37 PM
© Harcourt • Grade 3
109 Grammar Practice Book
INDEX
AAbbreviations, 27–30, 36
calendar, 28, 30, 36
postal, 27, 28, 30, 35
titles of people, 27, 29, 30, 35
Action verbs, 67–70, 72
Adjectives, 55–58
comparing with, 59–62, 71
Adverbs, 95–98, 107
comparing with, 96–98, 107
Antecedentsagreement with pronouns, 49–54
Apostrophesin contractions, 99–102, 108
in possessive nouns, 38
Articles, 63–66, 72
BBe (verb), 73–79, 89
CCapitalization
proper nouns, 24–26, 35
sentences, 1–6, 17, 103, 105
titles, 104–105
Commands, 5–8
Commas, 103, 105
compound sentences, 20–21
compound subjects and predicates,
14–16
series, 14–16, 18
Common nouns, 23, 25–26
Complete predicates, 9–12, 18
Complete subjects, 11–12
Compound predicates, 13–16, 18
Compound sentences, 19–22, 35
Compound subjects, 13–16, 18
Conjunctions, 20–22
Contractions, 99–102, 108
DDeclarative sentences, 1–4
EEnd marks, 1–8, 17
Exclamations, 5–8
Exclamatory sentences, 5–8
FFuture-tense verbs, 85–88, 90
HHelping verbs, 77–80, 89
IImperative sentences, 5–8
Interrogative sentences, 2–4
Irregular verbs, 91–94
MMain and helping verbs, 77–80, 89
MechanicsSee Capitalization; Commas; End marks;
Punctuation
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_109.indd 109RXENL08AWK31_GPB_109.indd 109 9/18/06 6:28:19 PM9/18/06 6:28:19 PM
© Harcourt • Grade 3
110 Grammar Practice Book
NNegatives, 99–102, 108
Nounscapitalization of, 24–26, 35
common, 23, 25–26
possessive, 37–40, 53
proper, 23–26, 35
singular and plural, 31–34, 36
See also Abbreviations; Titles
OObject pronouns, 45–48, 53–54
PPast-tense verbs, 85, 87–88, 90–94, 107
Plural nouns, 31–34, 36
Plural possessive nouns, 37–40
Plural pronouns, 42–44
Possessive nouns, 37–40, 53
Predicatescomplete, 9–12, 18
compound, 13–16, 18
simple, 10–12
Present-tense verbs, 81–85, 87–88,
90–94, 107
Pronounsantecedents of, 49–54
singular and plural, 41–44
subject and object, 45–48, 53–54
Proper nouns, 23–26, 35
Punctuation, 103–106
apostrophes in contractions, 99–102,
108
Punctuation (con’t)
apostrophes in possessive nouns, 38
commas, 14–16, 20–21, 103, 105
end marks, 1–8, 17
QQuestions, 2–4
SSentences
capitalization of, 1–6, 17, 103, 105
compound, 19–22, 35
simple, 19, 35
Sentences, kinds ofdeclarative, 1–4
exclamatory, 5–8
imperative, 5–8
interrogative, 2–4
Simple predicates, 10–12
Simple sentences, 19, 35
Simple subjects, 9, 11–12, 18
Singular nouns, 31–34, 36
Singular possessive nouns, 37–40
Singular pronouns, 41, 43–44
Statements, 1–4
Subject pronouns, 45–48, 53–54
Subject-verb agreement, 68–70, 73–76,
81–84, 89–90
Subjectscomplete, 11–12
compound, 13–16, 18
simple, 9, 11–12, 18
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_110.indd 110RXENL08AWK31_GPB_110.indd 110 9/18/06 6:28:28 PM9/18/06 6:28:28 PM
© Harcourt • Grade 3
111 Grammar Practice Book
TTenses
future, 85–88, 90
past, 85, 87–88, 90–94, 107
present, 81–85, 87–88, 90–94, 107
Theme ReviewsTheme 1, 17–18
Theme 2, 35–36
Theme 3, 53–54
Theme 4, 71–72
Theme 5, 89–90
Theme 6, 107–108
Titlescapitalization of, 27, 29, 30, 36,
103–106, 108
of people, 27, 29, 30, 35
of books, songs, poems, 104–106, 108
See also Abbreviations; Punctuation
VVerbs
action, 67–70, 72
be, forms of, 73–79, 89
future tense, 85–88, 90
irregular, 91–94
main and helping, 77–80, 89
past tense, 85, 87–88, 90–94, 107
present tense, 81–85, 87–88,
90–94, 107
See also Subject-verb agreement
RXENL08AWK31_GPB_111.indd 111RXENL08AWK31_GPB_111.indd 111 9/18/06 6:28:38 PM9/18/06 6:28:38 PM
GrammarPractice Book
Teacher EditionGrade 3
Visit The Learning Site!
www.harcourtschool.com
Copyright © by Harcourt, Inc.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording, or any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publisher.
Requests for permission to make copies of any part of the work should be addressed to School Permissions and Copyrights, Harcourt, Inc., 6277 Sea Harbor Drive, Orlando, Florida 32887-6777. Fax: 407-345-2418.
HARCOURT and the Harcourt Logo are trademarks of Harcourt, Inc., registered in the United States of America and/or other jurisdictions.Printed in the United States of America
ISBN 10 0-15-349916-8ISBN 13 978-0-15-3499166
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 073 12 11 10 09 08 07 06
If you have received these materials as examination copies free of charge, Harcourt School Publishers retains title to the materials and they may not be resold. Resale of examination copies is strictly prohibited and is illegal.
Possession of this publication in print format does not entitle users to convert this publication, or any portion of it, into electronic format.
RXENL08ATE31_GPB_i.indd 1RXENL08ATE31_GPB_i.indd 1 10/26/06 5:16:20 PM10/26/06 5:16:20 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
ContentsTHEME 1
Lesson 1 Statements and Questions ......................................................................... 3Lesson 2 Commands and Exclamations .................................................................... 5Lesson 3 Complete and Simple Subjects and Predicates ........................................... 7Lesson 4 Compound Subjects and Predicates ........................................................... 9Lesson 5 Review .................................................................................................... 11
THEME 2
Lesson 6 Simple and Compound Sentences ........................................................... 12Lesson 7 Common and Proper Nouns ................................................................... 14Lesson 8 Abbreviations ........................................................................................... 16Lesson 9 Singular and Plural Nouns ........................................................................ 18Lesson 10 Review .................................................................................................... 20
THEME 3
Lesson 11 Possessive Nouns .................................................................................... 21Lesson 12 Singular and Plural Pronouns ................................................................... 23Lesson 13 Subject and Object Pronouns ................................................................... 25Lesson 14 Pronoun-Antecedent Agreement .............................................................. 27Lesson 15 Review .................................................................................................... 29
THEME 4
Lesson 16 Adjectives ................................................................................................ 30Lesson 17 Adjectives That Compare ......................................................................... 32Lesson 18 Articles .................................................................................................... 34Lesson 19 Action Verbs ............................................................................................ 36Lesson 20 Review .................................................................................................... 38
THEME 5
Lesson 21 The Verb Be .............................................................................................. 39Lesson 22 Main and Helping Verbs ........................................................................... 41Lesson 23 Present-Tense Verbs ................................................................................. 43Lesson 24 Past-Tense and Future-Tense Verbs ........................................................... 45Lesson 25 Review .................................................................................................... 47
THEME 6
Lesson 26 Irregular Verbs ......................................................................................... 48Lesson 27 Adverbs ................................................................................................... 50Lesson 28 Contractions ............................................................................................ 52Lesson 29 Punctuation ............................................................................................. 54Lesson 30 Review .................................................................................................... 56
RXENL08ATE31_GPB_ii.indd iiRXENL08ATE31_GPB_ii.indd ii 10/26/06 5:17:35 PM10/26/06 5:17:35 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eSt
atem
ents
an
d
Qu
esti
on
s
Less
on
1R
ewri
te e
ach
gro
up o
f w
ord
s to
fo
rm a
st
atem
ent
that
mak
es s
ense
. Use
cap
ital
lett
ers
and
en
d m
arks
co
rrec
tly.
1.
Vaug
hn o
n M
aple
Str
eet
lives
2.
he a
stu
dent
new
is
3.
mat
h he
enj
oys
4.
flute
the
he
pla
ys
5.
from
Lon
don
is A
ndre
a
6.
scie
nce
she
good
is a
t
7.
lives
she
nea
r p
ark
the
8.
she
likes
dan
ce t
o
9.
teac
hes
Mr.
Jack
son
third
gra
de
10.
He
the
wel
com
es c
hild
ren
new
Vaug
hn li
ves
on M
aple
Stre
et.
He is
a n
ew s
tude
nt.
He e
njoy
s m
ath.
He p
lays
the
flute
.
Andr
ea is
from
Lon
don.
She
is g
ood
at s
cien
ce.
She
likes
to d
ance
.
She
lives
nea
r the
par
k.
Mr.
Jack
son
teac
hes
third
gra
de.
He w
elco
mes
the
new
chi
ldre
n.
1G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_001
.indd
18/
10/0
66:
33:2
9PM
3 Student Edition p. 1
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 3RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 3 10/4/06 9:18:24 PM10/4/06 9:18:24 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eSt
atem
ents
an
d
Qu
esti
on
s
Less
on
1R
ewri
te e
ach
gro
up o
f w
ord
s to
fo
rm a
que
stio
nth
at m
akes
sen
se. U
se c
apit
al le
tter
s an
d e
nd
m
arks
co
rrec
tly.
1.
you
do a
bro
ther
hav
e
2.
wha
t hi
s na
me
is
3.
he t
o sc
hool
go
does
4.
he r
ead
can
5.
pla
y he
doe
s w
here
Turn
eac
h s
tate
men
t in
to a
que
stio
n. U
se t
he
wo
rd
in p
aren
thes
es (
) a
s th
e fi
rst
wo
rd.
6.
My
little
sis
ter’s
nam
e is
Sar
a. (
Wha
t)
7.
She
cop
ies
ever
ythi
ng I
do. (
Why
)
8.
She
mee
ts m
e af
ter
scho
ol. (
Whe
n)
9.
She
wan
ts t
o go
to
the
stor
e. (
Whe
re)
Do y
ou h
ave
a br
othe
r?
Wha
t is
his
nam
e?
Does
he
go to
sch
ool?
Can
he re
ad?
Whe
re d
oes
he p
lay?
Wha
t is
your
littl
e si
ster
’s n
ame?
Why
doe
s sh
e co
py e
very
thin
g yo
u do
?
Whe
n do
es s
he m
eet y
ou?
Poss
ible
resp
onse
s ar
e sh
own.
Whe
re d
oes
she
wan
t to
go?
2G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_002
.indd
28/
15/0
610
:04:
42AM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eG
ram
mar
–Wri
tin
g
Co
nn
ecti
on
Less
on
1R
ead
th
is p
art
of
a st
uden
t’s
roug
h d
raft
. Th
en
answ
er t
he
que
stio
ns
that
fo
llow
.
(1) I
to l
ike
skip
. (2) W
hy
do I
skip
(3) it
is
more
fun
th
an w
alkin
g. (4
) I s
kip
all
th
e w
ay t
o s
chool
(5)
Wit
h m
y fr
ien
ds
at r
eces
s. (6
)
you l
ike
to
skip
, too?
1.
In
whi
ch s
ente
nce
are
the
wor
ds in
an
orde
r th
at d
oes
not
mak
e se
nse?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 2
CSe
nten
ce 4
DSe
nten
ce 5
2.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
does
not
tel
l a
com
ple
te t
houg
ht?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 3
CSe
nten
ce 4
DSe
nten
ce 5
3.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
shou
ld e
nd
with
a q
uest
ion
mar
k?A
Sent
ence
2B
Sent
ence
3C
Sent
ence
4D
Sent
ence
5
4.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
is m
issi
ng a
p
erio
d?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
2C
Sent
ence
4D
Sent
ence
5
5.
Whi
ch w
ord
in S
ente
nce
3 sh
ould
be
cap
italiz
ed?
Ais
Bit
Cw
ayD
fun
6.
Whi
ch w
ord
wou
ld m
ake
sens
e
in t
he b
lank
in S
ente
nce
6?A
Why
BBu
tC
Do
DW
here
Gra
mm
ar P
ract
ice
Bo
ok
3
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_003
.indd
38/
15/0
610
:05:
00AM
4 Student Edition pp. 2–3
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 4RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 4 10/4/06 9:18:25 PM10/4/06 9:18:25 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e St
atem
ents
an
d
Qu
esti
on
s
Less
on
1A
dd
th
e co
rrec
t en
d m
ark
to e
ach
sen
ten
ce.
Then
lab
el e
ach
as
a st
atem
ent
or
a qu
esti
on.
1.
Whe
re is
the
tea
cher
2.
I do
not
like
to ju
mp
3.
Whe
n do
es A
nita
run
4.
Do
you
know
Mr.
Wan
g
5.
We
pla
y in
the
gra
ss
Rew
rite
eac
h g
roup
of
wo
rds
to f
orm
a s
tate
men
t o
r a
que
stio
n. P
ut t
he
wo
rds
in a
n o
rder
th
at m
akes
sen
se.
Use
cap
ital
lett
ers
and
en
d m
arks
co
rrec
tly.
6.
to t
he p
ark
I go
(sta
tem
ent)
7.
do w
alk
you
to s
choo
l (q
uest
ion)
8.
Will
ow b
all t
he t
hrow
s (s
tate
men
t)
9.
can
Kurt
pla
y so
ftba
ll (s
tate
men
t)
10.
you
can
foot
ball
pla
y (q
uest
ion)
ques
tion
?
stat
emen
t. ?
?
.
ques
tion
ques
tion
stat
emen
t
I go
to th
e pa
rk.
Do y
ou w
alk
to s
choo
l?
Will
ow th
row
s th
e ba
ll.
Kurt
can
play
sof
tbal
l.
Can
you
play
foot
ball?
4G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_004
.indd
4
8/15
/06
10:
05:2
4 AM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eC
om
man
ds
and
Ex
clam
atio
ns
Less
on
2R
ewri
te e
ach
sen
ten
ce, u
sin
g c
apit
al le
tter
s an
den
d m
arks
co
rrec
tly.
Th
en la
bel
eac
h a
s a
com
man
do
r an
exc
lam
atio
n.
1.
give
the
boo
k to
Vio
let
2.
wha
t a
grea
t au
thor
he
is
3.
how
exc
ited
I am
to
read
his
new
sto
ry
4.
let
your
bro
ther
rea
d
5.
oop
s, I
lost
the
boo
k
6.
help
me
find
it
7.
sear
ch in
the
livi
ng r
oom
8.
wow
, it
is a
mes
s in
her
e
9.
hurr
ay, h
ere
it is
10.
look
at
the
pre
tty
cove
r
How
exc
ited
I am
to re
ad h
is n
ew s
tory
!; ex
clam
atio
n
Give
the
book
to V
iole
t.; c
omm
and
Wha
t a g
reat
aut
hor h
e is
!; ex
clam
atio
n
Let y
our b
roth
er re
ad.;
com
man
d
Oops
, I lo
st th
e bo
ok!;
excl
amat
ion
Help
me
find
it.; c
omm
and
Sear
ch in
the
livin
g ro
om.;
com
man
d
Wow
, it i
s a
mes
s in
her
e!; e
xcla
mat
ion
Hurr
ay, h
ere
it is
!; ex
clam
atio
n
Look
at t
he p
retty
cov
er.;
com
man
d
5G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_005
.indd
58/
10/0
66:
34:1
9PM
5 Student Edition pp. 4–5
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 5RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 5 10/4/06 9:18:27 PM10/4/06 9:18:27 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eC
om
man
ds
and
Ex
clam
atio
ns
Less
on
2R
ewri
te e
ach
sen
ten
ce, u
sin
g c
apit
al le
tter
s an
den
d m
arks
co
rrec
tly.
Th
en la
bel
eac
h a
s a
stat
emen
t,a
ques
tion
, a c
omm
and,
or
an e
xcla
mat
ion.
1.
Cat
hy w
ants
to
be a
writ
er
2.
read
Cat
hy’s
sto
ry
3.
wha
t do
es s
he w
rite
abou
t
4.
wha
t a
good
writ
er C
athy
is
Ad
d w
ord
s an
d e
nd
mar
ks t
o m
ake
four
kin
ds
of
sen
ten
ces
out
of
the
wo
rds
in t
he
bo
x. th
e th
ing
s C
ath
y d
oes
5.
a q
uest
ion
6.
a st
atem
ent
7.
an e
xcla
mat
ion
8.
a co
mm
and
Poss
ible
resp
onse
s ar
e sh
own.
Cath
y w
ants
to b
e a
writ
er.;
stat
emen
t
Read
Cat
hy’s
sto
ry.;
com
man
d
Wha
t a g
ood
writ
er C
athy
is!;
excl
amat
ion
Wha
t doe
s sh
e w
rite
abou
t?; q
uest
ion
Wha
t are
the
thin
gs C
athy
doe
s?
Thes
e ar
e th
e th
ings
Cat
hy d
oes.
Wow
, Cat
hy d
oes
som
e ex
citin
g th
ings
!
Thin
k ab
out t
he th
ings
Cat
hy d
oes.
6G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_006
.indd
69/
18/0
66:
25:1
8PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eG
ram
mar
–Wri
tin
gC
on
nec
tio
n
Less
on
2R
ead
th
is p
art
of
a st
uden
t’s
roug
h d
raft
. Th
en
answ
er t
he
que
stio
ns
that
fo
llow
.
(1) W
ow, t
od
ay w
as a
n e
xcit
ing
day
. (2) W
hat
an
inte
rest
ing
tim
e w
e h
ad (3
) A f
iref
igh
ter
visi
ted
our
sch
ool.
(4) O
ur
teac
her
how
to p
rep
are.
(5) S
he
told
us
to t
hin
k o
f ques
tion
s to
ask
th
e fi
refi
ghte
r (6)
Wh
at
ques
tion
do y
ou t
hin
k I
ask
ed.
1.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
shou
ld e
nd
with
an
excl
amat
ion
poi
nt?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 4
CSe
nten
ce 5
DSe
nten
ce 6
2.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
shou
ld e
nd
with
a q
uest
ion
mar
k?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
3C
Sent
ence
4D
Sent
ence
6
3.
Whi
ch e
nd m
ark
shou
ld
Sent
ence
2 h
ave?
Aa
per
iod
Ba
com
ma
Ca
que
stio
n m
ark
Dan
exc
lam
atio
n p
oint
4.
Whi
ch e
nd m
ark
shou
ld e
nd
Sent
ence
5 h
ave?
Aa
per
iod
Ba
com
ma
Ca
que
stio
n m
ark
Dan
exc
lam
atio
n p
oint
5.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
is n
ot
com
ple
te?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 3
CSe
nten
ce 4
DSe
nten
ce 6
6.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
is c
orre
ct?
ASe
nten
ce 2
BSe
nten
ce 3
CSe
nten
ce 4
DSe
nten
ce 6
7G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_007
.indd
79/
18/0
66:
25:3
9PM
6 Student Edition pp. 6–7
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 6RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 6 10/4/06 9:18:29 PM10/4/06 9:18:29 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e C
om
man
ds
and
Ex
clam
atio
ns
Less
on
2If
th
e se
nte
nce
is c
om
ple
te, a
dd
a c
orr
ect
end
mar
k. If
th
e se
nte
nce
is n
ot
com
ple
te, w
rite
not
a se
nten
ce.
1.
My
fath
er is
an
auth
or
2.
How
he
love
s to
writ
e
3.
How
do
I hel
p h
im
4.
Thin
gs t
hat
he c
an w
rite
abou
t
5.
Read
his
late
st b
ook
6.
Wow
, it’s
exc
iting
Ad
d w
ord
s an
d e
nd
mar
ks t
o m
ake
four
kin
ds
of
sen
ten
ces.
Each
sen
ten
ce is
sta
rted
fo
r yo
u.
7.
a st
atem
ent
You
8.
a co
mm
and
Go
9.
an e
xcla
mat
ion
Wha
t
10.
a q
uest
ion
Wha
t
. !
?
not a
sen
tenc
e
.
!
Poss
ible
resp
onse
s ar
e sh
own.
have
bro
wn
eyes
.
to s
choo
l.
a ni
ce d
ay it
is!
are
you
doin
g?
Poss
ible
resp
onse
s ar
e sh
own.
8G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_008
.indd
8
8/10
/06
6:3
5:56
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eC
om
ple
te a
nd
Si
mp
le S
ub
ject
s an
d P
red
icat
es
Less
on
3
Ch
oo
se f
ou
r se
nte
nce
s fr
om
a b
oo
k o
r m
agaz
ine.
Wri
te t
he
sen
ten
ces.
U
nd
erlin
e th
e si
mp
le s
ub
ject
s.
Un
der
line
the
sim
ple
sub
ject
. Wri
te t
he
pre
dic
ate.
1.
Lisa
wen
t to
boa
rdin
g sc
hool
.
2.
My
good
frie
nd le
arne
d at
hom
e.
3.
He
rode
the
bus
to
scho
ol.
4.
His
old
er s
iste
r st
udie
d da
nce.
5.
I wen
t to
sch
ool.
6.
Lero
y en
joye
d co
llege
.
7.
The
high
sch
ool s
tude
nt w
orke
d on
Sun
days
.
8.
Dad
hel
ped
my
brot
her.
9.
The
little
girl
pai
nted
pic
ture
s.
wen
t to
boar
ding
sch
ool Ac
cept
reas
onab
le re
spon
ses.
lear
ned
at h
ome
rode
the
bus
to s
choo
l
stud
ied
danc
e
wen
t to
scho
ol
enjo
yed
colle
ge
wor
ked
on S
unda
ys
help
ed m
y br
othe
r
pain
ted
pict
ures
9G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_009
.indd
98/
10/0
66:
37:0
5PM
7 Student Edition pp. 8–9
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 7RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 7 10/4/06 9:18:30 PM10/4/06 9:18:30 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eC
om
ple
te a
nd
Si
mp
le S
ub
ject
s an
d P
red
icat
es
Less
on
3U
nd
erlin
e th
e co
mp
lete
pre
dic
ate.
Wri
te t
he
sim
ple
pre
dic
ate.
1.
Han
nah
likes
mat
h.
2.
Scie
nce
is m
y fa
vorit
e su
bjec
t.
3.
Jam
il st
udie
s Fr
ench
eve
ry d
ay.
4.
My
cous
in w
ears
a u
nifo
rm t
o sc
hool
.
5.
The
teac
her
pla
ns h
er le
sson
car
eful
ly.
6.
The
boys
cle
an t
heir
desk
s.
7.
The
child
ren
read
qui
etly
.
8.
Som
e st
uden
ts u
se a
com
put
er.
9.
Ever
yone
enj
oys
the
clas
s tr
ip.
10.
Vale
rie p
ract
ices
the
tru
mp
et.
likes
is stud
ies
wea
rs
plan
s
clea
n
read
use
enjo
ys
prac
tices
10G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_010
.indd
108/
10/0
66:
37:5
7PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eG
ram
mar
–Wri
tin
g
Co
nn
ecti
on
Less
on
3R
ead
th
is p
art
of
a st
uden
t’s
roug
h d
raft
. Th
en
answ
er t
he
que
stio
ns
that
fo
llow
.
(1) M
y li
ttle
bro
ther
is
five
yea
rs o
ld. (2
) He
goes
to k
ind
erga
rten
. (3) K
ind
erga
rten
fun
. (4) T
he
youn
g
chil
dre
n l
earn
wit
h t
oys
and
gam
es.
1.
Whi
ch is
the
com
ple
te s
ubje
ct
of S
ente
nce
1?A
My
little
Bbr
othe
rC
My
little
bro
ther
Dis
five
yea
rs o
ld
2.
Whi
ch is
the
com
ple
te
pre
dica
te o
f Sen
tenc
e 1?
Ais
Bfiv
e ye
ars
old
CM
y lit
tle b
roth
erD
is fi
ve y
ears
old
3.
Whi
ch is
the
sim
ple
sub
ject
of
Sent
ence
2?
AH
e go
esB
to k
inde
rgar
ten
CH
eD
goes
4.
Whi
ch is
the
sim
ple
pre
dica
te
of S
ente
nce
2?A
He
Bgo
esC
goes
to
kind
erga
rten
Dto
kin
derg
arte
n
5.
Whi
ch is
the
com
ple
te s
ubje
ct
of S
ente
nce
4?A
The
youn
g ch
ildre
nB
child
ren
Cch
ildre
n le
arn
Dle
arn
6.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
does
not
hav
e a
corr
ect
pre
dica
te?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 2
CSe
nten
ce 3
DSe
nten
ce 4
11G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_011
.indd
118/
15/0
610
:06:
45AM
8 Student Edition pp. 10–11
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 8RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 8 10/4/06 9:18:32 PM10/4/06 9:18:32 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e C
om
ple
te a
nd
Si
mp
le S
ub
ject
s an
d P
red
icat
es
Less
on
3A
dd
a c
om
ple
te s
ubje
ct t
o e
ach
pre
dic
ate.
Then
un
der
line
the
sim
ple
sub
ject
.
1.
w
ent
to s
choo
l.
2.
p
laye
d ou
tsid
e.
3.
at
e lu
nch.
4.
to
ok a
nap
.
5.
p
erfo
rmed
on
stag
e.
6.
w
as m
ade
of b
rick.
Ad
d a
co
mp
lete
pre
dic
ate
to e
ach
sub
ject
. Th
en u
nd
erlin
e th
e si
mp
le
pre
dic
ate.
7.
An
art
teac
her
.
8.
The
exci
ted
child
ren
.
9.
He
.
10.
My
mot
her
.
11.
The
scho
ol
.
12.
The
tired
bab
y
.
The
good
stu
dent
Thre
e bo
ys
The
hung
ry c
hild
ren
The
little
girl
Som
e da
ncer
s
The
new
hou
se cam
e to
our
cla
ssro
om
jum
ped
up a
nd d
own
wal
ked
to th
e st
ore
help
ed m
e st
udy
was
on
the
corn
er
clos
ed h
er e
yesPo
ssib
le re
spon
ses
are
show
n.
Poss
ible
resp
onse
s ar
e sh
own.
12G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_012
.indd
12
8/10
/06
6:4
0:13
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eC
om
po
un
dSu
bje
cts
and
Pr
edic
ates
Less
on
4R
ewri
te e
ach
pai
r o
f se
nte
nce
s as
on
e se
nte
nce
.D
raw
on
e lin
e un
der
eac
h c
om
po
und
sub
ject
an
dtw
o li
nes
un
der
eac
h c
om
po
und
pre
dic
ate.
1.
Juan
pla
yed
the
pia
no. H
is s
iste
r p
laye
d th
e p
iano
.
2.
The
child
ren
wor
ked
hard
. The
chi
ldre
n p
ract
iced
eve
ry d
ay.
3.
Mus
ic fi
lled
the
room
. Lau
ghte
r fil
led
the
room
.
4.
Mic
helle
wan
ted
to w
rite
poe
ms.
Die
go w
ante
d to
writ
e p
oem
s.
5.
They
wro
te in
the
ir no
tebo
oks.
The
y st
udie
d w
ith a
tea
cher
.
6.
My
uncl
e w
ent
to s
choo
l. M
y un
cle
lear
ned
to c
ook.
7.
Car
men
love
d so
ccer
. Her
cou
sin
love
d so
ccer
.
8.
They
pla
yed
toge
ther
. The
y w
on t
rop
hies
.
9.
Mr.
Han
’s s
tude
nts
talk
ed. M
r. H
an’s
stu
dent
s m
ade
pla
ns.
Juan
and
his
sis
ter p
laye
d th
e pi
ano.
The
child
ren
wor
ked
hard
and
pra
ctic
ed e
very
day
.
Mus
ic a
nd la
ught
er fi
lled
the
room
.
Mic
helle
and
Die
go w
ante
d to
writ
e po
ems.
They
wro
te in
thei
r not
eboo
ks a
nd s
tudi
ed w
ith a
teac
her.
My
uncl
e w
ent t
o sc
hool
and
lear
ned
to c
ook.
Carm
en a
nd h
er c
ousi
n lo
ved
socc
er.
They
pla
yed
toge
ther
and
won
trop
hies
.
Mr.
Han’
s st
uden
ts ta
lked
and
mad
e pl
ans.
13G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_013
.indd
139/
18/0
66:
25:5
9PM
9 Student Edition pp. 12–13
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 9RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 9 10/4/06 9:18:33 PM10/4/06 9:18:33 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eC
om
po
un
dSu
bje
cts
and
Pr
edic
ates
Less
on
4W
rite
th
e co
mp
oun
d s
ubje
ct o
f ea
ch s
ente
nce
.A
dd
co
mm
as w
her
e th
ey b
elo
ng
.
1.
Ravi
his
gra
ndm
othe
r an
d hi
s gr
andf
athe
r w
ent
to t
he s
choo
l con
cert
.
2.
Ravi
’s t
each
er h
is n
eigh
bor
and
his
frie
nd w
ere
in t
he a
udie
nce.
3.
The
viol
ins
cello
s an
d flu
tes
soun
ded
beau
tiful
.
4.
The
drum
s cy
mba
ls a
nd g
ong
pla
yed
an e
xciti
ng e
ndin
g.
5.
A t
all w
oman
a s
hort
man
and
a c
hild
left
the
hal
l firs
t.
Wri
te t
he
com
po
und
pre
dic
ate
of
each
sen
ten
ce. A
dd
co
mm
as w
her
e th
ey b
elo
ng
.
6.
Ravi
wen
t ho
me
chan
ged
into
paj
amas
and
clim
bed
into
bed
.
7.
He
lay
dow
n fe
ll as
leep
and
dre
amed
he
was
a m
usic
ian.
8.
He
pla
yed
a so
lo b
owed
and
sm
iled
at t
he a
udie
nce.
9.
The
audi
ence
sto
od u
p c
lap
ped
and
che
ered
.
Ravi
, his
gra
ndm
othe
r, an
d hi
s gr
andf
athe
r
Ravi
’s te
ache
r, hi
s ne
ighb
or, a
nd h
is fr
iend
The
viol
ins,
cel
los,
and
flut
es
The
drum
s, c
ymba
ls, a
nd g
ong
A ta
ll w
oman
, a s
hort
man
, and
a c
hild
wen
t hom
e, c
hang
ed in
to p
ajam
as, a
nd c
limbe
d in
to b
ed
lay
dow
n, fe
ll as
leep
, and
dre
amed
he
was
a m
usic
ian
play
ed a
sol
o, b
owed
, and
sm
iled
at th
e au
dien
ce
stoo
d up
, cla
pped
, and
che
ered
14G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_014
.indd
148/
10/0
66:
41:4
2PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eG
ram
mar
-Wri
tin
gC
on
nec
tio
n
Less
on
4R
ead
th
is p
art
of
a st
uden
t’s
roug
h d
raft
.Th
en a
nsw
er t
he
que
stio
ns
that
fo
llow
.
(1) M
adel
ine
and
Ell
a w
ere
sist
ers.
(2) T
hey
wan
ted
to b
e d
oct
ors
wh
en t
hey
gre
w u
p. (3
) Th
eir
moth
er s
har
ed t
hei
r go
al. (4
) Th
eir
fath
er
shar
ed t
hei
r go
al. (5
) Th
e gi
rls
work
ed h
ard
an
d g
ot
good
gra
des
.
(6) T
hey
got
into
a s
pec
ial
sch
ool
succ
eed
ed a
nd
bec
ame
doct
ors
.
1.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a co
mp
ound
sub
ject
?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
2C
Sent
ence
5D
Sent
ence
6
2.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
need
sco
mm
as t
o se
par
ate
the
com
pou
nd p
redi
cate
s?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
2C
Sent
ence
5D
Sent
ence
6
3.
Whi
ch s
ente
nces
cou
ld b
e jo
ined
to
mak
e on
e se
nten
ce
with
a c
omp
ound
sub
ject
? A
Sent
ence
s 2
and
3B
Sent
ence
s 3
and
4C
Sent
ence
s 4
and
5D
Sent
ence
s 5
and
6
4.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a co
mp
ound
pre
dica
te t
hat
is
writ
ten
corr
ectly
?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
3C
Sent
ence
5D
Sent
ence
6
5.
Whi
ch o
f the
se s
ente
nces
doe
s no
t ha
ve a
com
pou
nd s
ubje
ct
or a
com
pou
nd p
redi
cate
?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
2C
Sent
ence
5D
Sent
ence
6
6.
Whi
ch o
f the
se p
ossi
ble
final
se
nten
ces
has
a co
mp
ound
su
bjec
t?A
Thei
r dr
eam
cam
e tr
ue.
BTh
e si
ster
s an
d th
eir
pare
nts
had
a dr
eam
tha
t ca
me
true
.C
They
hea
led
and
cure
d.D
Peop
le a
dmire
d th
em.
15G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_015
.indd
158/
15/0
610
:08:
08AM
10 Student Edition pp. 14–15
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 10RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 10 10/4/06 9:18:35 PM10/4/06 9:18:35 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e C
om
po
un
d
Sub
ject
s an
d
Pred
icat
es
Less
on
4A
dd
a c
om
po
und
sub
ject
or
a co
mp
oun
d
pre
dic
ate
to c
om
ple
te e
ach
sen
ten
ce.
1.
s
tudi
ed a
rt.
2.
The
athl
etes
.
3.
The
mus
ic s
tude
nt
.
4.
t
ook
danc
e cl
asse
s.
5.
The
acto
r
.
6.
w
atch
ed t
he s
tars
.
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Ad
d c
om
mas
wh
ere
they
bel
on
g.
Dra
w o
ne
line
und
er e
ach
co
mp
oun
d s
ubje
ct a
nd
tw
o li
nes
und
er e
ach
co
mp
oun
d p
red
icat
e.
7.
The
socc
er p
laye
r ra
n ki
cked
and
sco
red.
8.
Exer
cise
res
t an
d he
alth
ful f
ood
mad
e th
e sw
imm
er s
tron
g.
9.
Raja
his
sis
ter
and
his
brot
her
wer
e go
od s
tude
nts.
10.
The
scie
ntis
t w
rote
a b
ook
won
a p
rize
and
gave
a s
pee
ch.
Poss
ible
resp
onse
s ar
e sh
own
Rita
and
Max ra
n an
d sw
am
prac
ticed
and
per
form
ed
Elen
a an
d he
r bes
t frie
nd
smile
d an
d w
aved
The
boy
and
girl
The
socc
er p
laye
r ran
, kic
ked,
and
sco
red.
Exer
cise
, res
t, an
d he
alth
ful f
ood
mad
e th
e sw
imm
er
stro
ng.
Raja
, his
sis
ter,
and
his
brot
her w
ere
good
stu
dent
s.
The
scie
ntis
t wro
te a
boo
k, w
on a
priz
e, a
nd g
ave
a sp
eech
.
16G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_016
.indd
16
8/10
/06
6:4
4:55
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e G
ram
mar
–Wri
tin
g
Co
nn
ecti
on
Less
on
5R
ead
th
is p
art
of
a st
uden
t’s
roug
h d
raft
.Th
en a
nsw
er t
he
que
stio
ns
that
fo
llow
.
(1) T
her
e is
som
eth
ing
new
in
Room
112 (2
) Can
you
gues
s w
hat
it
is (3
) our
rabbit
has
four
bab
ies.
(4) H
ow
tin
y
the
bun
nie
s ar
e! (5
) Wis
h c
ould
tak
e on
e h
om
e. (6
) Do y
ou
bun
nie
s li
ke?
1.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
shou
ld e
nd
with
a p
erio
d?A
Se
nten
ce 1
B
Sent
ence
2C
Se
nten
ce 4
D
Sent
ence
6
2.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
shou
ld e
nd
with
a q
uest
ion
mar
k?A
Se
nten
ce 1
B
Sent
ence
2C
Se
nten
ce 3
D
Sent
ence
4
3.
In
whi
ch s
ente
nce
are
the
wor
ds in
an
orde
r th
at d
oes
not
mak
e se
nse?
A
Sent
ence
2B
Se
nten
ce 3
C
Sent
ence
4D
Se
nten
ce 6
4.
Whi
ch w
ord
in S
ente
nce
3 sh
ould
be
cap
italiz
ed?
A
our
B
rabb
itC
fo
urD
ba
bies
5.
Whi
ch o
f the
follo
win
g is
NO
T a
com
ple
te s
ente
nce?
A
Sent
ence
1B
Se
nten
ce 3
C
Sent
ence
4D
Se
nten
ce 5
6.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
is c
orre
ct a
sit
is?
A
Sent
ence
3B
Se
nten
ce 4
C
Sent
ence
5D
Se
nten
ce 6
17G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_017
.indd
17
8/15
/06
10:
08:3
5 AM
11 Student Edition pp. 16–17
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 11RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 11 10/4/06 9:18:36 PM10/4/06 9:18:36 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
5
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
C
on
nec
tio
n
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft.
Then
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) E
ric
wat
ched
th
e n
ews
on
TV
. (2) H
is f
ath
er
wat
ched
th
e n
ews
on
TV
. (3) T
he
new
scas
ter
talk
ed
about
spec
ial
even
ts. (4
) A p
oli
ce o
ffic
er a
fir
efig
hte
r
and
a t
each
er t
augh
t th
ird
gra
der
s ab
out
safe
ty. (5
) Th
e
may
or
took
a t
rip
an
d g
ave
a sp
eech
.
1.
Whi
ch is
the
sim
ple
sub
ject
of
Sent
ence
1?
A
Eric
B
Eric
wat
ched
C
the
new
sD
w
atch
ed t
he n
ews
on T
V
2.
Whi
ch is
the
com
ple
te
pre
dica
te o
f Sen
tenc
e 3?
A
the
new
scas
ter
B
the
new
scas
ter
talk
edC
ta
lked
D
talk
ed a
bout
sp
ecia
l eve
nts
3.
Wha
t is
mis
sing
in S
ente
nce
4?A
co
mm
asB
a
subj
ect
C
a si
mp
le p
redi
cate
D
a co
mp
lete
pre
dica
te
4.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a co
mp
ound
sub
ject
?A
Se
nten
ce 1
B
Sent
ence
3C
Se
nten
ce 4
D
Sent
ence
5
5.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a co
mp
ound
pre
dica
te?
A
Sent
ence
2B
Se
nten
ce 3
C
Sent
ence
4D
Se
nten
ce 5
6.
Whi
ch s
ente
nces
cou
ld b
e jo
ined
to
mak
e on
e se
nten
ce
with
a c
omp
ound
sub
ject
? A
Se
nten
ces
1 an
d 2
B
Sent
ence
s 2
and
3C
Se
nten
ces
3 an
d 4
D
Sent
ence
s 4
and
5
18G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_018
.indd
18
9/18
/06
6:2
6:29
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eSi
mp
le a
nd
C
om
po
un
dSe
nte
nce
s
Less
on
6If
th
e se
nte
nce
is c
om
ple
te, l
abel
it a
s si
mpl
e o
r co
mpo
und.
If it
is a
fra
gm
ent,
ad
d w
ord
s to
mak
e it
co
mp
lete
.
1.
My
big
sist
er h
as a
job.
2.
Aft
er s
choo
l.
3.
She
wor
ks a
t a
pet
sto
re.
4.
She
feed
s th
e an
imal
s, a
nd s
he c
lean
s th
eir
cage
s.
5.
Swee
ps
the
floor
.
6.
My
sist
er e
njoy
s he
r jo
b, b
ut s
he a
lso
likes
wee
kend
s.
7.
She
spen
ds t
ime
with
frie
nds,
or
she
rela
xes
at h
ome.
8.
My
brot
her
is s
ixte
en, a
nd h
e w
orks
on
wee
kend
s.
9.
He
pac
ks b
ags
at a
sup
erm
arke
t.
10.
My
fam
ily.
sim
ple
She
wor
ks a
fter s
choo
l.
sim
ple
com
poun
d
She
swee
ps th
e flo
or.
com
poun
d
com
poun
d
com
poun
d
sim
ple
My
fam
ily is
hap
py.
Poss
ible
resp
onse
s ar
e sh
own
for 2
, 5, a
nd 1
0.
19G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_019
.indd
198/
15/0
610
:09:
48AM
12 Student Edition pp. 18–19
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 12RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 12 10/4/06 9:18:38 PM10/4/06 9:18:38 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eSi
mp
le a
nd
C
om
po
un
dSe
nte
nce
s
Less
on
6U
se t
he
wo
rds
in t
he
par
enth
eses
( )
to
join
th
e p
airs
of
sen
ten
ces.
Use
co
mm
as c
orr
ectl
y.
1.
Toda
y is
Sun
day.
And
y go
es t
o a
foot
ball
gam
e. (
and)
3.
He
is e
xcite
d. H
e ea
ts b
reak
fast
qui
ckly
. (an
d)
2.
Lind
a w
ants
to
go w
ith A
ndy.
She
is s
ick.
(bu
t)
4.
And
y’s
mot
her
goes
to
the
gam
e. H
is fa
ther
sta
ys h
ome.
(bu
t)
5.
Tany
a ha
s st
rong
legs
. She
love
s to
run
. (an
d)
6.
She
likes
sof
tbal
l. Sh
e lik
es b
aske
tbal
l mor
e. (
but)
7.
Som
e ch
ildre
n p
lay
in t
he g
ym. A
nna
pla
ys in
the
par
k. (
but)
8.
It is
a h
ot d
ay. C
hild
ren
sell
lem
onad
e. (
and)
9.
Dar
nell
likes
lem
onad
e. H
e lik
es m
ilk m
ore.
(bu
t)
10.
He
wal
ks t
o th
e st
ore.
He
buys
milk
. (an
d)
Toda
y is
Sun
day,
and
And
y go
es to
a fo
otba
ll ga
me.
He is
exc
ited,
and
he
eats
bre
akfa
st q
uick
ly.
Lind
a w
ants
to g
o w
ith A
ndy,
but
she
is s
ick.
Andy
’s m
othe
r goe
s to
the
gam
e, b
ut h
is fa
ther
sta
ys h
ome.
Tany
a ha
s st
rong
legs
, and
she
love
s to
run.
She
likes
sof
tbal
l, bu
t she
like
s ba
sket
ball
mor
e.
Som
e ch
ildre
n pl
ay in
the
gym
, but
Ann
a pl
ays
in th
e pa
rk.
It is
a h
ot d
ay, a
nd c
hild
ren
sell
lem
onad
e.
Darn
ell l
ikes
lem
onad
e, b
ut h
e lik
es m
ilk m
ore.
He w
alks
to th
e st
ore,
and
he
buys
milk
.
20G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_020
.indd
208/
15/0
610
:10:
28AM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eG
ram
mar
–Wri
tin
g
Co
nn
ecti
on
Less
on
6R
ead
th
is p
art
of
a st
uden
t’s
roug
h d
raft
. Th
en
answ
er t
he
que
stio
ns
that
fo
llow
.
(1) M
aya
is a
th
ird
gra
der
, or
she
hel
ps
her
fam
ily.
(2) S
he
was
hes
th
e
dis
hes
, an
d s
he
wat
ers
the
pla
nts
. (3) A
lso c
lean
s h
er r
oom
. (4) M
aya’
s
fath
er m
akes
bre
akfa
st m
ost
morn
ings
. (5) T
od
ay h
e le
aves
ear
ly f
or
work
.
(6) M
aya’
s bro
ther
cooks
eggs
, he
serv
es t
hem
to h
is f
amil
y.
1.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
is n
ot
com
ple
te?
ASe
nten
ce 2
BSe
nten
ce 3
CSe
nten
ce 4
DSe
nten
ce 5
2.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
is a
cor
rect
co
mp
ound
sen
tenc
e?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
2C
Sent
ence
4D
Sent
ence
6
3.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
an
inco
rrec
t jo
inin
g w
ord?
ASe
nten
ce 1
B
Sent
ence
2C
Sent
ence
5
DSe
nten
ce 6
4.
Sen
tenc
e 5
is
.A
mis
sing
a jo
inin
g w
ord
Bno
t co
mp
lete
Ca
sim
ple
sen
tenc
eD
a co
mp
ound
sen
tenc
e
5.
Whi
ch w
ord
wou
ld B
EST
follo
w
the
com
ma
in S
ente
nce
6?A
and
Bbu
tC
orD
toda
y
6.
Whi
ch s
ente
nces
cou
ld b
e jo
ined
with
a c
omm
a fo
llow
ed
bybu
t?A
Sent
ence
s 1
and
2B
Sent
ence
s 3
and
4C
Sent
ence
s 4
and
5D
Sent
ence
s 5
and
6
21G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_021
.indd
218/
15/0
610
:11:
21AM
13 Student Edition pp. 20–21
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 13RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 13 10/4/06 9:18:39 PM10/4/06 9:18:39 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e Si
mp
le a
nd
C
om
po
un
d
Sen
ten
ces
Less
on
6R
ewri
te t
he
sen
ten
ces.
Use
co
mm
as a
nd
join
ing
w
ord
s co
rrec
tly.
1.
My
fath
er is
a t
each
er a
nd h
e w
orks
at
a sc
hool
.
2.
He
driv
es t
o w
ork,
he
take
s a
bus.
3.
He
has
lunc
h at
wor
k or
he
eats
in t
he p
ark.
4.
Mos
t da
ys h
e ea
ts t
una,
tod
ay h
e ea
ts e
gg s
alad
.
Rew
rite
eac
h p
air
of
sen
ten
ces
as o
ne
sen
ten
ce. U
se c
om
mas
an
d t
he
join
ing
wo
rds
and
or
but
corr
ectl
y.
5.
Mrs
. Lop
ez lo
ves
to r
ead.
She
ow
ns a
boo
ksto
re.
6.
The
stor
e is
sm
all.
It h
as m
any
book
s.
7.
Sash
a w
orks
with
ani
mal
s. S
he e
njoy
s he
r jo
b.
8.
She
lives
in t
he c
ount
ry. S
he w
orks
in t
he c
ity.
My
fath
er is
a te
ache
r, an
d he
wor
ks a
t a s
choo
l.
He d
rives
to w
ork,
or h
e ta
kes
a bu
s.
He h
as lu
nch
at w
ork,
or h
e ea
ts in
the
park
.
Mos
t day
s he
eat
s tu
na, b
ut to
day
he e
ats
egg
sala
d.
Mrs
. Lop
ez lo
ves
to re
ad, a
nd s
he o
wns
a b
ooks
tore
.
The
stor
e is
sm
all,
but i
t has
man
y bo
oks.
Sash
a w
orks
with
ani
mal
s, a
nd s
he e
njoy
s he
r job
.
She
lives
in th
e co
untr
y, b
ut s
he w
orks
in th
e ci
ty.
22G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_022
.indd
22
8/15
/06
10:
15:2
3 AM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eC
om
mo
n a
nd
Pr
op
er N
ou
ns
Less
on
7U
nd
erlin
e th
e co
mm
on
no
uns.
Cir
cle
the
pro
per
no
uns.
1.
Offi
cer
Cha
n is
from
Dal
las,
Tex
as.
2.
Mar
ta h
as a
dog
nam
ed R
ufus
.
3.
The
fam
ily a
dop
ts t
wo
tiny
kitt
ens.
4.
Fish
sw
im in
the
Atla
ntic
Oce
an.
5.
Kang
aroo
s an
d ko
alas
live
in A
ustr
alia
.
6.
Stev
e vi
sits
the
big
zoo
in L
os A
ngel
es.
7.
The
child
ren
see
a p
rett
y de
er.
8.
Ther
e ar
e m
any
seal
s in
Can
ada
and
Gre
enla
nd.
9.
Cha
rlie
rides
a b
lack
hor
se a
t th
e fa
ir.
10.
Mr.
Jone
s fe
eds
the
bird
s in
Cen
tral
Par
k.
11.
Peop
le w
atch
bat
s in
Gai
nesv
ille
, Flo
rida.
12.
Buffy
is a
whi
te d
og, a
nd P
uff i
s an
ora
nge
cat.
Fin
d a
n a
rtic
le in
a m
agaz
ine.
Lis
t fi
ve c
om
mo
n n
ou
ns
fro
m t
he
arti
cle.
Th
en li
st f
ive
pro
per
no
un
s.Ac
cept
reas
onab
le re
spon
ses.
23G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_023
.indd
238/
15/0
610
:14:
00AM
14 Student Edition pp. 22–23
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 14RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 14 10/4/06 9:18:40 PM10/4/06 9:18:40 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eC
om
mo
n a
nd
Pr
op
er N
ou
ns
Less
on
7R
ewri
te e
ach
sen
ten
ce c
orr
ectl
y. C
apit
aliz
e th
e p
rop
er n
oun
s.
1.
A z
ooke
eper
cam
e to
cla
ss o
n th
ursd
ay.
2.
Emm
a go
t a
rabb
it on
val
entin
e’s
day.
3.
On
satu
rday
we
visi
ted
the
anim
al p
ark.
4.
The
child
ren
lear
ned
abou
t th
e fir
st t
hank
sgiv
ing.
5.
The
first
day
of w
inte
r w
as w
edne
sday
, dec
embe
r 21
.
6.
Pres
iden
ts’ d
ay w
as in
febr
uary
.
7.
Whi
ch h
olid
ay w
as o
n fr
iday
, nov
embe
r 11
?
8.
Elija
h w
ent
to t
he b
each
eve
ry s
unda
y in
july
.
9.
The
fam
ily w
ent
on v
acat
ion
in d
ecem
ber.
10.
The
mem
oria
l day
pic
nic
was
on
mon
day,
may
28.
A zo
okee
per c
ame
to c
lass
on
Thur
sday
.
Emm
a go
t a ra
bbit
on V
alen
tine’
s Da
y.
On S
atur
day
we
visi
ted
the
anim
al p
ark.
The
child
ren
lear
ned
abou
t the
firs
t Tha
nksg
ivin
g.
The
first
day
of w
inte
r was
Wed
nesd
ay, D
ecem
ber 2
1.
Pres
iden
ts’ D
ay w
as in
Feb
ruar
y.
Whi
ch h
olid
ay w
as o
n Fr
iday
, Nov
embe
r 11?
Elija
h w
ent t
o th
e be
ach
ever
y Su
nday
in J
uly.
The
Mem
oria
l Day
pic
nic
was
on
Mon
day,
May
28.
The
fam
ily w
ent o
n va
catio
n in
Dec
embe
r.
24G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_024
.indd
248/
15/0
610
:14:
48AM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eG
ram
mar
–Wri
tin
g
Co
nn
ecti
on
Less
on
7
(1) R
obin
an
d P
am a
re s
iste
rs, a
nd
th
ey l
ive
in M
ich
igan
. (2) T
hei
r
fam
ily
got
a n
ew p
up
py
on
lab
or
day
. (3) D
aisy
is
a gu
ide
dog,
an
d s
he
wil
l
hel
p b
lin
d p
eop
le w
hen
sh
e gr
ows
up.
(4) T
he
chil
dre
n a
nd
th
eir
par
ents
rais
e th
e p
up
py.
(5) E
very
t
hey
go t
o a
dog
trai
nin
g cl
ass
in D
etro
it.
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft. T
hen
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
1.
Whi
ch w
ord
in S
ente
nce
1 is
a
com
mon
nou
n?A
Robi
nB
sist
ers
Cliv
eD
Mic
higa
n
2.
Whi
ch w
ord
or w
ords
in
Sent
ence
2 s
houl
d be
ca
pita
lized
?A
fam
ilyB
new
Cp
upp
yD
labo
r da
y
3.
Whi
ch o
f the
se w
ords
in
Sent
ence
3 is
NO
T a
noun
?A
Dai
syB
dog
Cgr
ows
Dp
eop
le
4.
How
man
y no
uns
are
in
Sent
ence
4?
A1
B2
C3
D4
5.
A p
rop
er n
oun
belo
ngs
in t
he
blan
k in
Sen
tenc
e 5.
Whi
ch
wor
d is
cor
rect
?A
Satu
rday
Bw
eek
CH
olid
ayD
april
6.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
does
NO
T ha
ve a
pro
per
nou
n?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
3C
Sent
ence
4D
Sent
ence
5
25G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_025
.indd
259/
18/0
66:
26:5
6PM
15 Student Edition pp. 24–25
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 15RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 15 10/4/06 9:18:42 PM10/4/06 9:18:42 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e C
om
mo
n a
nd
Pr
op
er N
ou
ns
Less
on
7R
ewri
te e
ach
sen
ten
ce c
orr
ectl
y.
1.
dann
y ha
s a
Part
ner
in t
he c
lass
room
.
2.
Her
Nam
e is
ann
.
3.
Dan
ny a
nd a
nn s
tudy
eve
ry A
fter
noon
.
4.
On
frid
ays
the
Chi
ldre
n le
arn
mat
h.
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
co
rrec
tly.
Un
der
line
the
com
mo
n n
oun
s. C
ircl
e th
e p
rop
er n
oun
s.
5.
Inde
pen
denc
e da
y w
as o
n tu
esda
y.
6.
Yani
’s c
lass
wen
t to
new
yor
k ci
ty a
nd s
aw fi
rew
orks
.
7.
Ligh
ts fi
lled
the
sky
over
the
hud
son
river
.
8.
The
Stud
ents
wro
te a
rep
ort
abou
t th
eir
trip
.
Dann
y ha
s a
partn
er in
the
clas
sroo
m.
Her n
ame
is A
nn.
Dann
y an
d An
n st
udy
ever
y af
tern
oon.
On F
riday
s th
e ch
ildre
n le
arn
mat
h.
Inde
pend
ence
Day
was
on
Tues
day.
Yani
’s c
lass
wen
t to
New
Yor
k Ci
ty a
nd s
aw fi
rew
orks
.
The
stud
ents
wro
te a
repo
rt ab
out t
heir
trip.
Ligh
ts fi
lled
the
sky
over
the
Huds
on R
iver
.
26G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_026
.indd
26
8/15
/06
10:
20:5
8 AM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eA
bb
revi
atio
ns
Less
on
8W
rite
th
e ab
bre
viat
ion
s fo
r th
e un
der
lined
wo
rds.
1.
Jean
-Luc
vis
its t
he U
nite
d St
ates
.
2.
Sprin
gfie
ld is
a c
ity in
Illin
ois.
3.
Doc
tor
Witk
y liv
es o
n Pi
ne R
oad.
4.
Tani
sha
is fr
om N
ew M
exic
o, b
ut n
ow s
he li
ves
in O
rego
n.
5.
The
pol
ice
stat
ion
is o
n th
e co
rner
of E
ast
Stre
et a
nd N
orth
Ave
nue.
6.
Was
hing
ton
is n
ext
to C
alifo
rnia
.
7.
Mis
tres
s Ro
sen
owns
a h
ouse
in R
hode
Isla
nd.
8.
Writ
e to
Mis
ter
Ngo
at
122
Long
Ave
nue,
Gar
y, In
dian
a.
9.
Lake
Erie
is n
orth
of O
hio,
Pen
nsyl
vani
a, a
nd N
ew Y
ork.
10.
Doc
tor
Har
rison
tak
es a
bus
from
Mis
siss
ipp
i to
Ala
bam
a.
U.S.
IL Dr.,
Rd.
NM, O
R
St.,
Ave
.
WA,
CA
Mrs
., R
I
Mr.,
Ave
., IN
OH, P
A, N
Y
Dr.,
MS,
AL
27G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_027
.indd
278/
15/0
611
:08:
44AM
16 Student Edition pp. 26–27
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 16RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 16 10/4/06 9:18:43 PM10/4/06 9:18:43 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eA
bb
revi
atio
ns
Less
on
8W
rite
th
e ab
bre
viat
ion
fo
r ea
ch w
ord
.
1.
Janu
ary
2.
Satu
rday
3.
Wed
nesd
ay
4.
Mar
ch
5.
Sep
tem
ber
6.
Frid
ay
Co
rrec
t th
e ab
bre
viat
ion
s.
7.
Oct
19
8.
aug.
25
9.
mon
, feb
. 5
10.
tues
, nov
9
Jan.
Sat.
Wed
.
Mar
.
Sept
.
Fri.
Oct.
19
Aug.
25
Mon
., F
eb. 5
Tues
., N
ov. 9
28G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_028
.indd
289/
18/0
66:
27:2
1PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eG
ram
mar
–Wri
tin
g
Co
nn
ecti
on
Less
on
8
(1)
Blo
ck s
tud
ies
the
anim
als
in t
he
oce
an.
(2) H
e ca
me
to o
ur
sch
ool
on T
hurs
day
, Dec
ember
29.
(3) O
ur
sch
ool
is i
n M
E. (4
) He
dro
ve h
is c
ar f
rom
MA
.
(5) T
he
stud
ents
in
Mis
tres
s L
ewis
’s cl
ass
enjo
yed
his
tal
k.
1.
Whi
ch a
bbre
viat
ion
coul
d go
in
the
bla
nk in
Sen
tenc
e 1?
AM
rB
mr
CM
r. D
dr.
2.
Whi
ch is
the
cor
rect
ab
brev
iatio
n fo
r th
e un
derli
ned
wor
d in
Sen
tenc
e 2?
Ath
u.B
THC
Thur
sD
Thur
s.
3.
Whi
ch is
the
cor
rect
ab
brev
iatio
n fo
r th
e m
onth
in
Sent
ence
2?
AD
ec.
Bde
c.C
DE
Dde
c
4.
Whi
ch w
ord
shou
ld r
epla
ce t
he
abbr
evia
tion
in S
ente
nce
3?A
Mas
sach
uset
tsB
Mai
neC
Min
neso
taD
Mis
siss
ipp
i
5.
Whi
ch w
ord
shou
ld r
epla
ce
the
abbr
evia
tion
in
Sent
ence
4?
AM
assa
chus
etts
BM
aine
CM
inne
sota
DM
onta
na
6.
Whi
ch is
the
cor
rect
ab
brev
iatio
n fo
r th
e un
derli
ned
wor
d in
Sen
tenc
e 5?
AM
rsB
Mrs
.C
Ms
DM
s.
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft. T
hen
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w. 29
Gra
mm
ar P
ract
ice
Bo
ok
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_029
.indd
298/
15/0
611
:11:
26AM
17 Student Edition pp. 28–29
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 17RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 17 10/4/06 9:18:44 PM10/4/06 9:18:44 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e A
bb
revi
atio
ns
Less
on
8W
rite
th
e fu
ll w
ord
fo
r ea
ch a
bb
revi
atio
n.
1.
FL
2.
Tues
.
3.
Dr.
4.
St.
5.
Ap
r.
Fin
d t
he
wo
rds
in e
ach
sen
ten
ce t
hat
hav
e ab
bre
viat
ion
s. W
rite
th
e ab
bre
viat
ion
s.
6.
Mis
ter
War
d’s
par
ty is
on
Sund
ay, N
ovem
ber
5.
7.
Send
the
lett
er t
o D
octo
r Jo
hnso
n at
5 M
esa
Stre
et, E
l Pas
o, T
exas
.
8.
In S
epte
mbe
r, M
istr
ess
Torr
es’s
cla
ss g
oes
to t
he a
nim
al s
helte
r on
Ri
ver
Aven
ue.
9.
Tenn
esse
e an
d M
isso
uri a
re n
ext
to K
entu
cky.
10.
Mis
tres
s Br
echt
sp
oke
at t
he s
choo
l on
Bars
tow
Roa
d on
Frid
ay.
Flor
ida
Tues
day
Doct
or
Stre
et
April
Mr.,
Sun
., N
ov.
Dr.,
St.,
TX
Sept
., M
rs.,
Ave
.
TN, M
O, K
Y
Mrs
., R
d., F
ri.
30G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_030
.indd
30
8/15
/06
11:
17:0
8 AM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eSi
ng
ula
r an
d P
lura
l N
ou
ns
Less
on
9Re
wri
te e
ach
sen
ten
ce u
sin
g t
he
plu
ral f
orm
of
the
und
erlin
ed n
oun
. Use
th
e w
ord
in p
aren
thes
es (
)
bef
ore
each
plu
ral n
oun
.
1.
Ari
bake
s a
cake
. (tw
o)
2.
He
put
s th
em in
a b
ox. (
two)
3.
Plea
se b
uy a
ban
ana.
(so
me)
4.
We
need
a b
unch
. (th
ree)
5.
Lily
pic
ks a
ber
ry. (
ten)
6.
Mar
co w
ants
a c
ooki
e. (
four
)
7.
Abb
y ea
ts a
pea
r. (t
wo)
8.
She
give
s he
r si
ster
a c
herr
y. (
five)
9.
My
fath
er c
uts
a p
epp
er. (
two)
10.
My
brot
her
eats
a b
ite. (
thre
e)
Ari b
akes
two
cake
s.
He p
uts
them
in tw
o bo
xes.
Plea
se b
uy s
ome
bana
nas.
We
need
thre
e bu
nche
s.
Lily
pic
ks te
n be
rrie
s.
Mar
co w
ants
four
coo
kies
.
Abby
eat
s tw
o pe
ars.
She
give
s he
r sis
ter f
ive
cher
ries.
My
fath
er c
uts
two
pepp
ers.
My
brot
her e
ats
thre
e bi
tes.
31G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_031
.indd
318/
15/0
611
:17:
21AM
18 Student Edition pp. 30–31
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 18RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 18 10/4/06 9:18:46 PM10/4/06 9:18:46 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eSi
ng
ula
r an
d P
lura
l N
ou
ns
Less
on
9R
ewri
te e
ach
sen
ten
ce u
sin
g t
he
plu
ral f
orm
of
the
und
erlin
ed n
oun
. Use
a d
icti
on
ary
if y
ou
nee
d t
o. E
ach
new
sen
ten
ce is
sta
rted
fo
r yo
u.
1.
One
chi
ld h
ad c
erea
l for
bre
akfa
st.
Th
ree
2.
One
wom
an b
aked
bro
wni
es.
Tw
o
3.
One
mou
se r
an t
o th
e fo
od b
owl.
Th
ree
4.
One
dee
r p
ulle
d le
aves
from
the
tre
e.
Fo
ur
5.
One
goo
se a
te t
he b
read
.
Fi
ve
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Rep
lace
th
e si
ng
ular
no
uns
in
par
enth
eses
( )
wit
h t
he
plu
ral f
orm
. Use
a d
icti
on
ary
if y
ou
nee
d t
o.
6.
Billy
’s (
foot
) ar
e tir
ed.
7.
Billy
and
the
(m
an)
cook
sou
p fo
r di
nner
.
8.
Aft
er d
inne
r he
bru
shes
his
(to
oth)
.
child
ren
had
cere
al fo
r bre
akfa
st.
wom
en b
aked
bro
wni
es.
mic
e ra
n to
the
food
bow
l.
deer
pul
led
leav
es fr
om th
e tre
e.
gees
e at
e th
e br
ead.
Billy
’s fe
et a
re ti
red.
Billy
and
the
men
coo
k so
up fo
r din
ner.
Afte
r din
ner h
e br
ushe
s hi
s te
eth.
32G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_032
.indd
328/
15/0
611
:18:
26AM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eG
ram
mar
–Wri
tin
g
Co
nn
ecti
on
Less
on
9
1.
Whi
ch is
the
cor
rect
plu
ral
form
of t
he u
nder
lined
wor
d in
Se
nten
ce 2
?A
dish
sB
dish
ies
Cdi
shes
Ddi
sh
2.
Whi
ch is
the
cor
rect
plu
ral
form
of t
he u
nder
lined
wor
d in
Se
nten
ce 3
?A
fork
esB
fork
sC
fork
ies
Dfo
rk
3.
Whi
ch w
ord
in S
ente
nce
4 is
N
OT
a p
lura
l nou
n?A
put
sB
glas
ses
Cm
enD
wom
en
4.
The
und
erlin
ed w
ord
in
Sent
ence
5 s
houl
d be
in it
s p
lura
l for
m. W
hich
is c
orre
ct?
Ach
ildB
child
sC
child
esD
child
ren
5.
A s
ingu
lar
noun
bel
ongs
in t
he
blan
k in
Sen
tenc
e 6.
Whi
ch
wor
d is
cor
rect
?A
dinn
ers
Bdi
nerie
sC
dinn
er’s
Ddi
nner
6.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
does
NO
T ha
ve a
plu
ral n
oun?
ASe
nten
ce 1
B
Sent
ence
3C
Sent
ence
4D
Sent
ence
5
(1) I
t is
Josh
’s tu
rn t
o s
et t
he
table
. (2) H
e use
s h
is f
amil
y’s
bes
t d
ish
. (3) H
e ta
kes
out
a fo
rk a
nd
sp
oon
s. (4
) He
puts
out
glas
ses
for
the
men
an
d w
om
en. (5
) He
puts
out
cup
s fo
r th
e
chil
d. (6
) Now
c
an b
e se
rved
.
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft. T
hen
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w. 33
Gra
mm
ar P
ract
ice
Bo
ok
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_033
.indd
339/
18/0
66:
27:5
1PM
19 Student Edition pp. 32–33
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 19RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 19 10/4/06 9:18:47 PM10/4/06 9:18:47 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e Si
ng
ula
r an
d P
lura
l N
ou
ns
Less
on
9W
rite
th
e co
rrec
t p
lura
l fo
rm o
f ea
ch s
ing
ular
n
oun
. Use
a d
icti
on
ary
if y
ou
nee
d t
o.
1.
pot
2.
rasp
berr
y
3.
tom
ato
4.
mea
l
5.
rabb
it
6.
moo
se
7.
shee
p
8.
pup
py
Rew
rite
th
e se
nte
nce
s. U
se t
he
plu
ral f
orm
s o
f th
e n
oun
s in
par
enth
eses
( )
. Use
a d
icti
on
ary
if y
ou
nee
d t
o.
9.
The
(chi
ld)
mad
e (s
andw
ich)
.
10.
Am
ber
slic
ed (
carr
ot)
and
(ap
ple
).
11.
Do
you
wan
t (b
lueb
erry
) or
(p
each
)?
12.
Brus
h yo
ur (
toot
h) a
fter
you
eat
the
(st
raw
berr
y).
pots
pupp
ies
rasp
berr
ies
rabb
its
tom
atoe
s
mea
ls
shee
p
moo
se
The
child
ren
mad
e sa
ndw
iche
s.
Ambe
r slic
ed c
arro
ts a
nd a
pple
s.
Do y
ou w
ant b
lueb
errie
s or
pea
ches
?
Brus
h yo
ur te
eth
afte
r you
eat
the
stra
wbe
rrie
s.
34G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_034
.indd
34
8/15
/06
11:
24:1
3 AM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
10
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
C
on
nec
tio
n
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft. T
hen
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) M
rs. S
anch
ez’s
clas
s per
form
ed a
pla
y on
, O
ctob
er 2
.
(2) T
he
Pla
y w
as a
t th
e M
adis
on E
lem
enta
ry S
choo
l. (3)
At
7:00
p.m
.
(4) M
y si
ster
Ela
ine
acte
d, s
he
did
a g
reat
job.
(5) M
y be
dti
me
is
8:00
p.m
. (6) M
y par
ents
let
me
stay
up la
te t
o w
atch
th
e pla
y.
1.
Whi
ch w
ord
coul
d go
in t
he
blan
k in
Sen
tenc
e 1?
A
Mon
day
B
tues
day
C
even
ing
D
lunc
htim
e
2.
Whi
ch w
ord
in S
ente
nce
2 is
in
corr
ectly
cap
italiz
ed?
A
Play
B
Mad
ison
C
Elem
enta
ryD
Sc
hool
3.
Whi
ch w
ord
shou
ld fo
llow
the
co
mm
a in
Sen
tenc
e 4?
A
but
B
orC
an
dD
to
nigh
t
4.
Whi
ch is
the
pro
per
nou
n in
Se
nten
ce 4
?A
si
ster
B
Elai
neC
gr
eat
D
job
5.
Whi
ch t
wo
sim
ple
sen
tenc
es
coul
d be
join
ed b
y a
com
ma
follo
wed
by
but?
A
Sent
ence
s 1
and
2B
Se
nten
ces
3 an
d 4
C
Sent
ence
s 4
and
5D
Se
nten
ces
5 an
d 6
6.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
is N
OT
com
ple
te?
A
Sent
ence
2B
Se
nten
ce 3
C
Sent
ence
5D
Se
nten
ce 6
35G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_035
.indd
35
8/15
/06
11:
29:0
7 AM
20 Student Edition pp. 34–35
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 20RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 20 10/4/06 9:18:48 PM10/4/06 9:18:48 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
10
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
C
on
nec
tio
n
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft.
Then
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) T
her
e is
a m
yste
ry t
o s
olv
e at
10 M
oun
tain
Road
.
(2) T
he
Bro
oks
chil
dre
n c
an’t
fin
d t
hei
r p
up
py.
(3) W
hat
are
the
clue?
(4) T
he
door
is o
pen
, an
d c
ookie
s ar
e bak
ing
in t
he
house
acr
oss
th
e st
reet
. (5)
Bro
oks
says
sh
e
kn
ow
s w
her
e th
e p
up
py
is. (6
) Do y
ou?
1.
Wha
t is
the
abb
revi
atio
n fo
r th
e un
derli
ned
wor
d in
Se
nten
ce 1
?A
rd
B
rd.
C
Rd.
D
RD
2.
Wha
t is
the
cor
rect
plu
ral f
orm
of
the
nou
n in
Sen
tenc
e 3?
A
clue
B
clue
sC
cl
uees
D
clui
es
3.
How
man
y SI
NG
ULA
R no
uns
are
in S
ente
nce
4?A
tw
oB
th
ree
C
four
D
five
4.
How
man
y PL
URA
L no
uns
are
in S
ente
nce
4?A
on
eB
tw
oC
th
ree
D
four
5.
Whi
ch a
bbre
viat
ion
coul
d go
in
the
bla
nk in
Sen
tenc
e 5?
A
mrs
B
Mrs
C
MS
D
Mrs
.
6.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
an
irreg
ular
plu
ral n
oun?
A
Sent
ence
2B
Se
nten
ce 3
C
Sent
ence
4D
Se
nten
ce 5
36G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_036
.indd
36
8/15
/06
11:
30:0
7 AM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
ePo
sses
sive
No
un
s
Less
on
11
Wri
te t
he
po
sses
sive
no
un in
eac
h s
ente
nce
.La
bel
it a
s si
ngul
ar o
r pl
ural
.
1.
Rico
’s fa
mily
has
thr
ee c
hild
ren.
2.
My
brot
hers
’ toy
s ar
e on
the
floo
r.
3.
Her
sis
ter’s
nam
e is
Kris
ten.
4.
Mas
on r
ides
in h
is a
unt’s
car
.
5.
The
fam
ilies
’ hom
es a
re n
earb
y.
6.
The
boys
’ gra
ndfa
ther
com
es t
o vi
sit.
7.
Wha
t is
you
r m
othe
r’s jo
b?
8.
Shan
e w
ears
his
cou
sin’
s ha
t.
9.
Mr.
Dal
y en
joys
his
son
s’ s
oftb
all g
ame.
10.
The
dog’
s le
ash
is o
n th
e ta
ble.
Rico
’s; s
ingu
lar
brot
hers
’; pl
ural
sist
er’s
; sin
gula
r
aunt
’s; s
ingu
lar
fam
ilies
’; pl
ural
boys
’; pl
ural
mot
her’s
; sin
gula
r
cous
in’s
; sin
gula
r
sons
’; pl
ural
dog’
s; s
ingu
lar
37G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_037
.indd
378/
15/0
611
:31:
42AM
21 Student Edition pp. 36–37
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 21RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 21 10/4/06 9:18:49 PM10/4/06 9:18:49 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
ePo
sses
sive
No
un
s
Less
on
11
If t
he
und
erlin
ed w
ord
nee
ds
an a
po
stro
ph
e (’
),re
wri
te it
co
rrec
tly.
If it
is c
orr
ect,
wri
te c
orre
ct.
1.
Ms.
Rot
h he
ld h
er d
augh
ters
han
d.
2.
The
scho
ols
audi
toriu
m w
as fu
ll.
3.
The
boys
per
form
ed in
a p
lay.
4.
My
fath
ers
cam
era
was
bro
ken.
5.
The
stud
ent
read
tw
o p
oem
s.
6.
How
man
y so
ngs
did
they
sin
g?
Wri
te t
he p
lura
l for
m o
f eac
h no
un. T
hen
wri
te t
he p
lura
l pos
sess
ive
form
.
7.
uncl
e
8.
gran
dson
9.
viol
inis
t
10.
glas
s
11.
cher
ry
12.
bana
na
daug
hter
’s
scho
ol’s
corr
ect
fath
er’s
corr
ect
corr
ect
uncl
es
bana
nas
viol
inis
ts
cher
ries
glas
ses
gran
dson
s
uncl
es’
bana
nas’
viol
inis
ts’
cher
ries’
glas
ses’
gran
dson
s’ 38G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_038
.indd
388/
15/0
611
:32:
37AM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
11
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft.
Then
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) M
r. K
won
cla
ss p
ut
on
a s
how
. (2) T
he
stud
ents
fam
ilie
s
wer
e in
th
e au
die
nce
. (3) T
he
stud
ent’s
per
form
ed d
iffe
ren
t
acts
. (4) T
he
act
of
Rac
hel
was
fun
ny.
(5) R
ach
el’s
par
ents
smil
ed a
nd
cla
pp
ed. (6
) All
th
e p
aren
ts e
njo
yed
th
e sh
ow
.
1.
Whi
ch s
ingu
lar
pos
sess
ive
noun
sh
ould
be
a p
lura
l nou
n?A
show
(Se
nten
ce 1
)B
audi
ence
(Se
nten
ce 2
)C
stud
ent’s
(Se
nten
ce 3
)D
act
(Sen
tenc
e 4)
2.
Whi
ch s
ingu
lar
noun
sho
uld
also
be
pos
sess
ive?
AM
r. Kw
on (
Sent
ence
1)
Bau
dien
ce (
Sent
ence
2)
Cac
t (S
ente
nce
4)D
show
(Se
nten
ce 6
)
3.
Whi
ch p
lura
l nou
n sh
ould
als
o be
pos
sess
ive?
Ast
uden
ts (
Sent
ence
2)
Bfa
mili
es (
Sent
ence
2)
Cac
ts (
Sent
ence
3)
Dp
aren
ts (
Sent
ence
5)
4.
How
cou
ld y
ou r
ewrit
eth
e un
derli
ned
phr
ase
in
Sent
ence
4?
Ath
e ac
t’s o
f Rac
hel
Bth
e ac
ts o
f Rac
hel
CRa
chel
’s a
ctD
Rach
els’
act
5.
Whi
ch o
ther
wor
d co
uld
rep
lace
pare
nts
in S
ente
nce
6?A
par
ents
’B
fam
ilies
’C
stud
ents
’D
fam
ilies
6.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
is c
orre
ct a
s it
is w
ritte
n?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
2C
Sent
ence
3D
Sent
ence
5
39G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_039
.indd
398/
15/0
611
:33:
42AM
22 Student Edition pp. 38–39
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 22RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 22 10/4/06 9:18:51 PM10/4/06 9:18:51 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e Po
sses
sive
No
un
s
Less
on
11
Rew
rite
eac
h p
hra
se. U
se t
he
corr
ect
po
sses
sive
no
un.
1.
the
cost
umes
tha
t be
long
to
the
girls
2.
the
danc
e of
Ron
3.
the
neck
lace
ow
ned
by h
er g
rand
mot
her
4.
the
bott
les
of t
he b
abie
s
5.
the
slee
ves
of t
he d
ress
es
6.
the
car
that
bel
ongs
to
my
mot
her
Wri
te s
ente
nce
s us
ing
th
e n
oun
bel
ow
. Th
e w
ord
s in
par
enth
eses
( )
te
ll w
hic
h f
orm
of
the
no
un t
o u
se.
dan
cer
7.
(sin
gula
r)
8.
(plu
ral)
9.
(sin
gula
r p
osse
ssiv
e)
10.
(plu
ral p
osse
ssiv
e)
Poss
ible
resp
onse
s ar
e sh
own.
the
girls
’ cos
tum
es
Ron’
s da
nce
her g
rand
mot
her’s
nec
klac
e
the
babi
es’ b
ottle
s
the
dres
ses’
sle
eves
my
mot
her’s
car
A da
ncer
per
form
ed a
t sch
ool.
Two
danc
ers
are
on s
tage
.
The
danc
er’s
cos
tum
e is
pre
tty.
The
danc
ers’
legs
wer
e so
re.
40G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_040
.indd
40
8/15
/06
11:
36:1
6 AM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eSi
ng
ula
r an
d P
lura
l Pr
on
ou
ns
Less
on
12
Wri
te t
he
two
sin
gul
ar p
ron
oun
s in
eac
h s
ente
nce
.
1.
She
sent
me
a p
ostc
ard.
2.
Whe
re d
id h
e p
ut it
?
3.
I gav
e he
r th
e bo
x.
4.
It w
as a
gift
for
you.
5.
You
spok
e to
him
tod
ay.
6.
He
saw
you
yes
terd
ay.
7.
She
told
me
the
stor
y.
8.
I enj
oyed
rea
ding
it.
9.
You
wro
te a
lett
er t
o he
r.
10.
Did
it in
tere
st h
im?
She,
me
he, i
t
I, he
r
It, y
ou
You,
him
He, y
ou
She,
me
I, it
You,
her
it, h
im
41G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_041
.indd
418/
15/0
62:
20:0
5PM
23 Student Edition pp. 40–41
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 23RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 23 10/4/06 9:18:52 PM10/4/06 9:18:52 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eSi
ng
ula
r an
d P
lura
l Pr
on
ou
ns
Less
on
12
Wri
te t
he
plu
ral p
ron
oun
in e
ach
sen
ten
ce.
1.
We
took
a fl
ight
to
Mex
ico.
2.
My
aunt
and
unc
le m
et u
s at
the
airp
ort.
3.
They
sm
iled
and
said
“W
elco
me!
”
4.
My
sist
er w
as e
xcite
d to
see
the
m.
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Use
a p
lura
l pro
no
un t
o r
epla
ce e
ach
un
der
lined
ph
rase
.
5.
The
girls
wen
t to
cam
p la
st s
umm
er.
6.
The
girls
wro
te t
o m
y fr
iend
and
me.
7.
My
frie
nd a
nd I
wro
te t
o th
e gi
rls.
8.
My
frie
nd a
nd I
told
the
girl
s ab
out
our
socc
er t
eam
.
9.
Did
you
and
you
r br
othe
r se
nd le
tter
s to
the
girl
s?
10.
The
girls
wer
e ha
pp
y to
get
the
lett
ers.
11.
The
lett
ers
arriv
ed e
very
Mon
day.
12.
They
just
got
a le
tter
from
Mom
and
Dad
.
We
us
They
them
They
wen
t to
cam
p la
st s
umm
er.
The
girls
wro
te to
us.
We
wro
te to
the
girls
.
My
frien
d an
d I t
old
them
abo
ut o
ur s
occe
r tea
m.
Did
you
send
lette
rs to
the
girls
?
The
girls
wer
e ha
ppy
to g
et th
em.
They
arr
ived
eve
ry M
onda
y.
They
just
got
a le
tter f
rom
them
.
42G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_042
.indd
428/
15/0
62:
21:3
4PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
12
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft.
Then
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) N
atas
ha
has
a p
en p
al n
amed
Ch
en. (2
) Ch
en liv
es i
n
Ch
ina.
(3) N
atas
ha
and
Ch
en w
rite
eve
ry w
eek. (4
) Nat
ash
a
and
Ch
en t
ell ea
ch o
ther
about
the
thin
gs t
hey
do.
(5) L
ast
wee
k N
atas
ha
wro
te t
o C
hen
about
the
sch
ool p
lay.
(6) N
atas
ha
told
him
th
at e
very
one
enjo
yed
th
e p
lay.
1.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a si
ngul
ar
pro
noun
?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
3C
Sent
ence
4D
Sent
ence
6
2.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a p
lura
l p
rono
un?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 3
CSe
nten
ce 4
DSe
nten
ce 6
3.
Whi
ch p
rono
un c
ould
rep
lace
th
e un
derli
ned
wor
d in
Se
nten
ce 2
?A
He
BH
imC
They
DIt
4.
Whi
ch p
rono
un c
ould
rep
lace
th
e un
derli
ned
wor
ds in
Se
nten
ce 4
?A
He
BSh
eC
They
DTh
em
5.
Whi
ch p
rono
un c
ould
rep
lace
th
e un
derli
ned
wor
d in
Se
nten
ce 6
?A
ItB
She
CH
erD
They
6.
Whi
ch w
ord(
s) c
ould
be
rep
lace
d by
the
pro
noun
it?
AN
atas
ha (
Sent
ence
1)
BN
atas
ha a
nd C
hen
(Sen
tenc
e 3)
Cw
eek
(Sen
tenc
e 5)
Dth
e p
lay
(Sen
tenc
e 6)
43G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_043
.indd
438/
15/0
62:
23:1
2PM
24 Student Edition pp. 42–43
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 24RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 24 10/4/06 9:18:54 PM10/4/06 9:18:54 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e Si
ng
ula
r an
d P
lura
l Pr
on
ou
ns
Less
on
12
Wri
te t
he
pro
no
un in
eac
h s
ente
nce
.Th
en la
bel
eac
h a
s S
(sin
gul
ar)
or
P (p
lura
l).
1.
We
lear
ned
abou
t C
hile
tod
ay.
2.
Mr.
Edw
ards
sho
wed
us
two
map
s.
3.
He
hung
the
map
s on
the
wal
l.
4.
They
sho
wed
vol
cano
es a
nd a
des
ert.
5.
The
stud
ents
look
ed a
t th
em c
aref
ully
.
6.
Mr.
Edw
ards
ask
ed m
e to
poi
nt t
o th
e de
sert
.
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
wit
h a
co
rrec
t p
ron
oun
.
7.
Elle
n st
udie
d Sp
anis
h be
caus
e w
ante
d to
vis
it Sp
ain.
8.
The
clas
s w
as fu
n, a
nd t
he s
tude
nts
enjo
yed
.
9.
The
teac
her
brou
ght
pic
ture
s to
sho
w
.
10.
He
took
the
pic
ture
s w
hen
was
in S
pai
n.
We;
P us; P
He; S
They
; P
them
; P
me;
S
Elle
n st
udie
d Sp
anis
h be
caus
e sh
e w
ante
d to
vis
it Sp
ain.
The
clas
s w
as fu
n, a
nd th
e st
uden
ts e
njoy
ed it
.
The
teac
her b
roug
ht p
ictu
res
to s
how
n th
em.
He to
ok th
e pi
ctur
es w
hen
he w
as in
Spa
in.
Poss
ible
resp
onse
s ar
e sh
own. 44
Gra
mm
ar P
ract
ice
Bo
ok
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_044
.indd
44
8/15
/06
2:2
5:32
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eSu
bje
ct a
nd
Ob
ject
Pro
no
un
s
Less
on
13
Wri
te t
he
pro
no
un in
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Th
enla
bel
eac
h p
ron
oun
as
subj
ect
or
obje
ct.
1.
Ms.
Edi
son
teac
hes
us a
bout
flow
ers.
2.
A s
tude
nt a
sks
her
how
flow
ers
grow
.
3.
Ms.
Edi
son
answ
ers
him
.
4.
She
talk
s to
the
cla
ss a
bout
sun
light
.
5.
Flow
ers
need
it t
o m
ake
food
and
gro
w.
6.
We
lear
n m
ore
abou
t flo
wer
s.
7.
Bees
col
lect
pol
len
from
the
m.
8.
I writ
e a
pap
er o
n flo
wer
s.
Fin
d f
ou
r se
nte
nce
s in
a b
oo
k o
r m
agaz
ine
that
hav
e p
ron
ou
ns.
C
op
y th
e se
nte
nce
s. U
nd
erlin
e th
e su
bje
ct p
ron
ou
ns.
Cir
cle
the
ob
ject
p
ron
ou
ns.
Acce
pt re
ason
able
resp
onse
s.
us; o
bjec
t
her;
obje
ct
him
; obj
ect
She;
sub
ject
it; o
bjec
t
We;
sub
ject
them
; obj
ect
I; su
bjec
t
45G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_045
.indd
458/
15/0
62:
27:3
4PM
25 Student Edition pp. 44–45
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 25RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 25 10/4/06 9:18:55 PM10/4/06 9:18:55 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eSu
bje
ct a
nd
Ob
ject
Pro
no
un
s
Less
on
13
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Use
sub
ject
pro
no
uns
corr
ectl
y.
1.
Me
and
Ann
a w
ent
to t
he li
brar
y.
2.
I and
she
stu
died
tre
es.
3.
You
and
me
look
ed a
t bo
oks
and
pic
ture
s.
4.
Me
and
he le
arne
d ab
out
pin
e tr
ees.
5.
I and
Deo
n w
rote
a r
epor
t to
geth
er.
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Use
ob
ject
pro
no
uns
corr
ectl
y.
6.
Show
the
flow
ers
to R
yan
and
I.
7.
My
mot
her
gave
me
and
my
sist
er a
pla
nt.
8.
Plea
se h
elp
him
and
I w
ith t
he r
epor
t.
9.
Jenn
y ca
me
to t
he li
brar
y w
ith h
im a
nd I.
10.
The
libra
rian
offe
red
to h
elp
me
and
Ryan
.
Anna
and
I w
ent t
o th
e lib
rary
.
She
and
I stu
died
tree
s.
You
and
I loo
ked
at b
ooks
and
pic
ture
s.
He a
nd I
lear
ned
abou
t pin
e tre
es.
Deon
and
I w
rote
a re
port
toge
ther
.
Show
the
flow
ers
to R
yan
and
me.
My
mot
her g
ave
my
sist
er a
nd m
e a
plan
t.
Plea
se h
elp
him
and
me
with
the
repo
rt.
Jenn
y ca
me
to th
e lib
rary
with
him
and
me.
The
libra
rian
offe
red
to h
elp
Ryan
and
me.
46G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_046
.indd
468/
15/0
62:
28:3
5PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
13
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft. T
hen
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) M
e an
d m
y m
oth
er p
lan
ted
an
ap
ple
see
d i
n a
pot.
(2) W
e w
ater
ed t
he
seed
. (3) T
he
seed
gre
w l
eave
s an
d r
oots
.
(4) M
y m
oth
er m
ove
d i
t to
th
e ya
rd. (5
) I w
atch
ed m
y m
oth
er
pac
k s
oil
aro
un
d t
he
litt
le p
lan
t. (6
) On
e d
ay t
he
seed
wil
l
bec
om
e an
ap
ple
tre
e.
1.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a si
ngul
ar
subj
ect
pro
noun
?A
Sent
ence
2B
Sent
ence
3C
Sent
ence
4D
Sent
ence
5
2.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a p
lura
l su
bjec
t p
rono
un?
ASe
nten
ce 2
BSe
nten
ce 4
CSe
nten
ce 5
DSe
nten
ce 6
3.
Whi
ch t
ype
of p
rono
un is
it in
Se
nten
ce 4
?A
sing
ular
sub
ject
pro
noun
Bp
lura
l sub
ject
pro
noun
Csi
ngul
ar o
bjec
t p
rono
unD
plu
ral o
bjec
t p
rono
un
4.
How
sho
uld
the
unde
rline
d p
hras
e in
Sen
tenc
e 1
be
writ
ten?
AM
y m
othe
r an
d m
eB
Me
and
her
CH
er a
nd m
eD
My
mot
her
and
I
5.
Whi
ch o
f the
se c
ould
rep
lace
th
e un
derli
ned
wor
ds in
Se
nten
ce 3
?A
a si
ngul
ar s
ubje
ct p
rono
unB
a p
lura
l sub
ject
pro
noun
Ca
sing
ular
obj
ect
pro
noun
Da
plu
ral o
bjec
t p
rono
un
6.
Whi
ch o
f the
se c
ould
rep
lace
th
e un
derli
ned
wor
ds in
Se
nten
ce 5
?A
a si
ngul
ar s
ubje
ct p
rono
unB
a p
lura
l sub
ject
pro
noun
Ca
sing
ular
obj
ect
pro
noun
Da
plu
ral o
bjec
t p
rono
un
47G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_047
.indd
478/
15/0
62:
29:5
4PM
26 Student Edition pp. 46–47
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 26RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 26 10/4/06 9:18:56 PM10/4/06 9:18:56 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e Su
bje
ct a
nd
Ob
ject
Pro
no
un
s
Less
on
13
Wri
te a
sub
ject
or
ob
ject
pro
no
un t
o r
epla
ce
each
un
der
lined
wo
rd o
r p
hra
se.
1.
Arie
l’s s
iste
r ta
ught
Arie
l abo
ut b
ees.
2.
Arie
l’s s
iste
r to
ld A
riel t
hat
bees
are
inse
cts.
3.
Arie
l and
I w
atch
ed b
ees
in t
he p
ark.
4.
Arie
l and
I sa
w t
he b
ees
fly.
5.
Arie
l’s fa
ther
gav
e A
riel a
nd m
e a
book
.
6.
The
book
had
pic
ture
s of
bee
s.
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Use
I an
d m
e co
rrec
tly.
7.
You
and
me
pic
ked
pea
rs fr
om t
he t
ree.
8.
Todd
ate
che
rrie
s w
ith m
y fr
iend
and
I.
9.
Me
and
my
brot
her
slic
ed a
pp
les.
10.
They
sha
red
the
plu
ms
with
me
and
him
.
her
She
We
them
us
It
You
and
I pic
ked
pear
s fro
m th
e tre
e.
Todd
ate
che
rrie
s w
ith m
y fri
end
and
me.
My
brot
her a
nd I
slic
ed a
pple
s.
They
sha
red
the
plum
s w
ith h
im a
nd m
e.
48G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_048
.indd
48
8/15
/06
2:3
3:23
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
ePr
on
ou
n–
An
tece
den
tA
gre
emen
t
Less
on
14
Wri
te t
he
corr
ect
pro
no
un f
or
each
sen
ten
ce.
Then
wri
te t
he
no
un t
hat
it r
efer
s to
.
1.
A b
ird c
atch
es w
orm
s an
d br
ings
(it/
them
) ba
ck t
o th
e ne
st.
2.
A m
ouse
eat
s th
e cr
umbs
tha
t (it
/the
y) fi
nds.
3.
The
dogs
see
the
man
, and
(hi
m/t
hey)
sta
rt t
o ba
rk.
4.
John
see
s M
icha
el a
nd w
aves
to
(him
/the
m).
5.
Squi
rrel
s ga
ther
nut
s an
d hi
de (
it/th
em).
6.
A s
pid
er s
pin
s a
web
and
tra
ps
flies
in (
it/th
em).
7.
Bats
eat
the
inse
cts
that
(it/
they
) ca
tch.
8.
Sim
on s
ees
two
little
kitt
ens
and
stop
s to
pet
(hi
m/t
hem
).
9.
A b
ear
goes
into
a c
ave,
whe
re (
it/th
ey)
slee
ps
all w
inte
r.
10.
The
boys
buy
a g
ift fo
r M
rs. J
ohns
on a
nd g
ive
it to
(he
r/th
em).
them
, wor
ms
it, m
ouse
they
, dog
s
him
, Mic
hael
them
, nut
s
it, w
eb
they
, bat
s
them
, kitt
ens
it, b
ear
her,
Mrs
. Joh
nson
49G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_049
.indd
498/
15/0
62:
35:3
4PM
27 Student Edition pp. 48–49
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 27RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 27 10/4/06 9:18:57 PM10/4/06 9:18:57 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
ePr
on
ou
n-
An
tece
den
tA
gre
emen
t
Less
on
14
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Rep
lace
th
e un
der
lined
wo
rd o
r p
hra
se w
ith
a p
ron
oun
.
1.
Luis
hug
s Be
th a
nd w
elco
mes
Bet
h ho
me.
2.
Beth
sm
iles
at L
uis
and
than
ks L
uis.
3.
My
sist
er in
vite
s Be
th t
o p
lay
in t
he g
arde
n.
4.
Luis
goe
s to
the
gar
den
too,
and
Lui
s p
lant
s flo
wer
s.
5.
Beth
find
s an
ant
hill
whe
n Be
th is
in t
he y
ard.
6.
John
mak
es d
inne
r w
hile
John
is in
the
kitc
hen.
7.
He
bake
s co
okie
s fo
r Ja
net
and
give
s th
em t
o Ja
net.
8.
Jane
t ea
ts a
coo
kie,
and
Jane
t th
anks
John
.
9.
John
is p
leas
ed b
ecau
se Jo
hn lo
ves
to b
ake.
10.
Jane
t bu
ys Jo
hn a
coo
kboo
k an
d gi
ves
the
cook
book
to
him
.
Luis
hug
s Be
th a
nd w
elco
mes
her
hom
e.
Beth
sm
iles
at L
uis
and
than
ks h
im.
She
invi
tes
Beth
to p
lay
in th
e ga
rden
.
Luis
goe
s to
the
gard
en to
o, a
nd h
e pl
ants
flow
ers.
Beth
find
s an
ant
hill
whe
n sh
e is
in th
e ya
rd.
John
mak
es d
inne
r whi
le h
e is
in th
e ki
tche
n.
He b
akes
coo
kies
for J
anet
and
giv
es th
em to
her
.
Jane
t eat
s a
cook
ie, a
nd s
he th
anks
Joh
n.
John
is p
leas
ed b
ecau
se h
e lo
ves
to b
ake.
Jane
t buy
s Jo
hn a
coo
kboo
k an
d gi
ves
it to
him
.
50G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_050
.indd
508/
15/0
62:
36:3
0PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
14
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft.
Then
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) M
r. K
ay l
ives
in
a h
ouse
th
at M
r. K
ay b
uil
t. (2
) Th
e
house
is
hig
h u
p i
n t
he
hil
ls, a
nd
it
is f
ar f
rom
th
e ci
ty.
(3) M
r. K
ay l
ikes
th
e h
ills
bec
ause
th
e h
ills
hav
e a
grea
t vi
ew o
f
the
city
. (4) M
r. K
ay’s
chil
dre
n d
rive
up
a w
ind
ing
road
wh
en
she
com
e to
vis
it. (5
) Th
e ch
ild
ren
love
th
eir
fath
er a
nd
en
joy
visi
tin
g
.
1.
Whi
ch p
rono
un c
ould
rep
lace
th
e un
derli
ned
wor
ds in
Se
nten
ce 1
?A
heB
she
Cth
eyD
it
2.
Whi
ch p
rono
un c
ould
rep
lace
th
e un
derli
ned
wor
ds in
Se
nten
ce 3
?A
heB
she
Cth
eyD
it
3.
Whi
ch p
rono
un c
ould
go
in t
he
blan
k in
Sen
tenc
e 5?
Ait
Bth
emC
him
Dhe
r
4.
Whi
ch w
ord
does
the
pro
noun
it
refe
r to
in S
ente
nce
2?A
hous
eB
high
Chi
llsD
city
5.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a p
rono
un
that
doe
s no
t ag
ree
with
the
no
un it
ref
ers
to?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 2
CSe
nten
ce 3
DSe
nten
ce 4
6.
Whi
ch p
rono
un c
ould
rep
lace
th
e un
derli
ned
wor
ds in
Se
nten
ce 5
?A
ItB
Them
CTh
eyD
He
51G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_051
.indd
518/
15/0
62:
37:3
7PM
28 Student Edition pp. 50–51
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 28RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 28 10/4/06 9:18:58 PM10/4/06 9:18:58 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e Pr
on
ou
n–
An
tece
den
tA
gre
emen
t
Less
on
14
Cir
cle
the
pro
no
un in
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Rew
rite
the
sen
ten
ce. C
orr
ect
the
pro
no
un s
o t
hat
it a
gre
esw
ith
th
e un
der
lined
wo
rd.
1.
The
nest
was
too
hig
h fo
r M
aria
to
see
him
.
2.
Mar
ia w
as e
xcite
d be
caus
e he
saw
an
owl.
3.
Luke
was
hom
esic
k w
hen
it w
ent
to c
amp
.
4.
The
girls
invi
ted
Hill
ary
to p
lay
with
her
.
5.
John
wro
te a
lett
er a
nd s
ent
them
hom
e.
6.
John
’s p
aren
ts w
rote
bac
k to
it.
Fill
in e
ach
bla
nk
wit
h a
co
rrec
t p
ron
oun
. Th
en u
nd
erlin
e th
e w
ord
o
r w
ord
s th
at t
he
pro
no
un r
efer
s to
.
7.
Hon
eybe
es li
ve in
hiv
es, w
here
h
ave
jobs
to
do.
8.
Wor
ker
bees
feed
the
que
en b
ee a
nd p
rote
ct
.
9.
Hon
eybe
es g
athe
r ne
ctar
and
use
t
o m
ake
hone
y.
10.
Som
e p
eop
le k
eep
bee
s an
d co
llect
hon
ey fr
om
.
The
nest
was
too
high
for M
aria
to s
ee it
.
Mar
ia w
as e
xcite
d be
caus
e sh
e sa
w a
n ow
l.
Luke
was
hom
esic
k w
hen
he w
ent t
o ca
mp.
The
girls
invi
ted
Hilla
ry to
pla
y w
ith th
em.
John
wro
te a
lette
r and
sen
t it h
ome.
John
’s p
aren
ts w
rote
bac
k to
him
.
they
her
it
them
52G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_052
.indd
52
8/15
/06
2:4
7:03
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
15
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft.
Then
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) T
ony
is t
he
frie
nd
of
Joan
. (2) T
ony
tells
Joa
n t
hat
he
is
upse
t. (3
) Joa
n a
sks
he
wh
at is
wro
ng.
(4) T
ony
says
th
at h
e lo
st h
is
mot
her
s pen
. (5) J
oan
hel
ps
him
look
for
th
e pen
. (6) T
oget
her
th
ey
fin
d it
un
der
Ton
y’s
bed
.
1.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a si
ngul
ar
pos
sess
ive
noun
?A
Se
nten
ce 2
B
Sent
ence
3C
Se
nten
ce 5
D
Sent
ence
6
2.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
an in
corr
ectly
writ
ten
pos
sess
ive
noun
?A
Se
nten
ce 2
B
Sent
ence
3C
Se
nten
ce 4
D
Sent
ence
6
3.
Whi
ch p
hras
e co
uld
rep
lace
the
unde
rline
d p
hras
e in
Se
nten
ce 1
?A
th
e fr
iend
’s o
f Joa
nB
th
e fr
iend
s of
Joan
C
Joan
’s fr
iend
D
Joan
s’ fr
iend
4.
Whi
ch p
rono
un c
ould
rep
lace
th
e un
derli
ned
wor
d in
Se
nten
ce 2
?A
he
B
she
C
him
D
her
5.
Whi
ch p
rono
un c
ould
rep
lace
th
e un
derli
ned
phr
ase
in
Sent
ence
5?
A
itB
he
rC
hi
mD
th
em
6.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
an
inco
rrec
t p
rono
un?
A
Sent
ence
3B
Se
nten
ce 4
C
Sent
ence
5D
Se
nten
ce 6
53G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_053
.indd
53
8/15
/06
2:4
8:37
PM
29 Student Edition pp. 52–53
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 29RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 29 10/4/06 9:19:00 PM10/4/06 9:19:00 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
15
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft.
Then
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) Y
asm
in w
rite
s fo
r a
new
spap
er t
hat
sh
e st
arte
d. (2
) Sh
e re
por
ts
on w
hat
is n
ew in
sch
ool.
(3) Y
este
rday
Yas
min
wro
te a
bout
som
eth
ing
that
hap
pen
ed t
o h
er. (4
) Sh
e fo
und a
kit
ten
in t
he
sch
ool p
layg
roun
d.
(5) Ya
smin
too
k th
e ki
tten
hom
e an
d g
ave
them
to
her
fat
her
. (6) H
er
fath
er w
as h
appy
to
hav
e th
e ki
tten
.
1.
Whi
ch w
ord
does
the
pro
noun
in
Sen
tenc
e 1
refe
r to
?A
Ya
smin
B
writ
esC
ne
wsp
aper
D
she
2.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a si
ngul
ar
subj
ect
pro
noun
?A
Se
nten
ce 2
B
Sent
ence
3C
Se
nten
ce 5
D
Sent
ence
6
3.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a si
ngul
ar
obje
ct p
rono
un?
A
Sent
ence
2B
Se
nten
ce 3
C
Sent
ence
4D
Se
nten
ce 6
4.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a p
rono
un
that
doe
s no
t ag
ree
with
the
no
un t
hat
it re
fers
to?
A
Sent
ence
1B
Se
nten
ce 2
C
Sent
ence
3D
Se
nten
ce 5
5.
Whi
ch c
ould
rep
lace
the
un
derli
ned
wor
ds in
Se
nten
ce 6
?A
a
sing
ular
sub
ject
pro
noun
B
a p
lura
l sub
ject
pro
noun
C
a si
ngul
ar o
bjec
t p
rono
unD
a
plu
ral o
bjec
t p
rono
un
6.
Whi
ch p
rono
un c
ould
rep
lace
th
e w
ords
the
kitt
en in
Se
nten
ce 5
?A
sh
eB
it
C
they
D
them
54G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_054
.indd
54
8/15
/06
2:5
0:13
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
16
Ad
ject
ives
Wri
te t
he
adje
ctiv
e. T
hen
wri
te t
he
no
un t
hat
it
des
crib
es.
1.
A b
row
n be
ar s
at in
the
cav
e.
2.
The
bear
was
hun
gry.
3.
The
fore
st w
as b
ig.
4.
The
racc
oon
saw
the
pur
ple
ber
ries.
5.
The
hap
py
racc
oon
ate
the
berr
ies.
6.
A s
mal
l chi
ld c
limbe
d a
rock
.
7.
The
rock
was
hug
e.
8.
A p
lant
gre
w in
a t
iny
pot
.
9.
The
pla
nt w
as g
reen
.
10.
The
pot
was
rou
nd.
11.
The
wol
f ran
thr
ough
the
dar
k w
oods
.
12.
The
wol
f was
gra
y.
Wri
te t
wo
sen
ten
ces
that
co
uld
beg
in a
sto
ry. U
se a
t le
ast
on
e ad
ject
ive
in e
ach
sen
ten
ce. C
ircl
e ea
ch a
dje
ctiv
e, a
nd
dra
w a
n a
rro
w t
o t
he
no
un
it
des
crib
es.
brow
n, b
ear
hung
ry, b
ear
big,
fore
st
purp
le, b
errie
s
happ
y, ra
ccoo
n
smal
l, ch
ild
huge
, roc
k
tiny,
pot
gree
n, p
lant
roun
d, p
ot
dark
, woo
ds
gray
, wol
f
Acce
pt re
ason
able
resp
onse
s.
55G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_055
.indd
558/
29/0
67:
36:0
6PM
30 Student Edition pp. 54–55
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 30RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 30 10/4/06 9:19:01 PM10/4/06 9:19:01 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
16
Ad
ject
ives
Wri
te t
he
adje
ctiv
e th
at t
ells
ho
w m
any.
1.
Som
e w
olve
s liv
e in
the
fore
st.
2.
Seve
n w
olve
s ru
n in
the
pac
k.
3.
The
wol
f has
five
toe
s on
eac
h p
aw.
4.
A w
olf’s
coa
t ha
s tw
o la
yers
.
5.
Wol
ves
how
l for
sev
eral
rea
sons
.
6.
The
mot
her
wol
f has
six
bab
ies.
Wri
te t
he
adje
ctiv
e th
at t
ells
ho
w m
any.
Rew
rite
th
e se
nte
nce
. R
epla
ce t
he
num
ber
wo
rd w
ith
an
ad
ject
ive
that
tel
ls h
ow
man
y w
ith
out
giv
ing
an
exa
ct n
umb
er.
7.
Four
stu
dent
s w
rote
a s
tory
tog
ethe
r.
8.
The
stor
y w
as a
bout
six
sq
uirr
els.
9.
A w
oman
rea
d el
even
sto
ries
to h
er c
hild
ren.
10.
Ther
e w
ere
seve
n p
ictu
res
in t
he b
ook.
11.
The
book
had
nin
ety
pag
es.
12.
Thre
e w
omen
wai
ted
for
the
bus
to a
rriv
e.
Som
e
Seve
n
five
two se
vera
l
six
four
; A fe
w s
tude
nts
wro
te a
sto
ry to
geth
er.
six;
The
sto
ry w
as a
bout
som
e sq
uirr
els.
elev
en; A
wom
an re
ad m
any
stor
ies
to h
er c
hild
ren.
seve
n; T
here
wer
e se
vera
l pic
ture
s in
the
book
.
nine
ty; T
he b
ook
had
man
y pa
ges.
A fe
w w
omen
wai
ted
for t
he b
us to
arr
ive.
Poss
ible
resp
onse
s ar
e sh
own.
56G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_056
.indd
568/
29/0
66:
47:0
3PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
16
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft.
Then
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) I
cli
mbed
a l
ittl
e tr
ee i
n m
y fr
ien
d’s
yard
. (2) I
pic
ked
ch
erri
es
from
th
e tr
ee. (3
) I g
ave
ch
erri
es t
o m
y fa
ther
. (4) M
y
fath
er h
ad g
reen
ap
ple
s at
hom
e. (5
) He
mad
e a
bea
uti
ful
sala
d w
ith
the
red
ch
erri
es a
nd
tw
o g
reen
ap
ple
s.
1.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
an
adje
ctiv
e th
at t
ells
how
man
y?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
2C
Sent
ence
4D
Sent
ence
5
2.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
an
adje
ctiv
e th
at t
ells
wha
t co
lor?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 2
CSe
nten
ce 3
DSe
nten
ce 4
3.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
an
adje
ctiv
e th
at t
ells
wha
t si
ze?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 2
CSe
nten
ce 4
DSe
nten
ce 5
4.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
does
NO
T ha
ve a
n ad
ject
ive?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 2
CSe
nten
ce 4
DSe
nten
ce 5
5.
Whi
ch is
the
BES
T w
ord
to
com
ple
te S
ente
nce
3?
Ath
inB
som
eC
unki
ndD
big
6.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
the
mos
t ad
ject
ives
?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
2C
Sent
ence
4D
Sent
ence
5
57G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_057
.indd
578/
29/0
66:
47:4
2PM
31 Student Edition pp. 56–57
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 31RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 31 10/4/06 9:19:02 PM10/4/06 9:19:02 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
16
Ad
ject
ives
Un
der
line
the
two
ad
ject
ives
in e
ach
sen
ten
ce.
Then
wri
te w
het
her
eac
h a
dje
ctiv
e te
lls w
hat
kind
or
how
man
y.
1.
Man
y w
olve
s ea
t fiv
e p
ound
s of
food
a d
ay.
2.
A fe
w w
olve
s ha
ve b
lue
eyes
.
3.
The
coat
s of
som
e w
olve
s ar
e w
hite
.
4.
Big
wol
ves
wei
gh m
ore
than
nin
ety
pou
nds.
Rew
rite
th
e se
nte
nce
s. A
dd
an
ad
ject
ive
bef
ore
eac
h u
nd
erlin
ed
no
un. U
se a
n a
dje
ctiv
e th
at a
nsw
ers
the
que
stio
n in
par
enth
eses
( )
.
5.
The
app
le fe
ll fr
om t
he t
ree.
(W
hat
colo
r?)
6.
Ther
e w
ere
app
les
on t
he t
ree.
(H
ow m
any?
)
7.
Fatim
a at
e th
e ap
ple
. (W
hat
size
?)
8.
I cut
the
ap
ple
into
slic
es. (
Wha
t sh
ape?
)
how
man
y; h
ow m
any
how
man
y; w
hat k
ind
how
man
y; w
hat k
ind
wha
t kin
d; h
ow m
any
The
red
appl
e fe
ll fro
m th
e tre
e.
Ther
e w
ere
man
y ap
ples
on
the
tree.
Fatim
a at
e th
e bi
g ap
ple.
I cut
the
roun
d ap
ple
into
slic
es.
Poss
ible
resp
onse
s ar
e sh
own.
58
Gra
mm
ar P
ract
ice
Bo
ok
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_058
.indd
58
8/29
/06
6:4
8:28
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eA
dje
ctiv
es T
hat
C
om
par
e
Less
on
17
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Use
th
e co
rrec
t fo
rm o
f th
e ad
ject
ive
in p
aren
thes
es (
).
1.
The
lion
is (
larg
e) t
han
the
fox.
2.
The
pea
cock
has
the
(p
rett
y) fe
athe
rs o
f all
the
bird
s.
3.
The
bear
is t
he (
stro
ng)
anim
al in
the
fore
st.
4.
The
beet
le is
(tin
y) t
han
the
wor
m.
5.
The
hors
e ru
ns (
fast
) th
an t
he d
onke
y.
6.
That
dog
has
the
(lo
ud)
bark
in t
own.
7.
Sabr
ina’
s ra
bbit
is (
fluffy
) th
an m
y ra
bbit.
8.
The
dolp
hin
is t
he (
smar
t) o
f all
the
ocea
n an
imal
s.
9.
The
cat
is (
frie
ndly
) to
day
than
it w
as y
este
rday
.
10.
We
have
the
(cu
te)
pet
on
the
bloc
k.
The
lion
is la
rger
than
the
fox.
The
peac
ock
has
the
pret
tiest
feat
hers
of a
ll th
e bi
rds.
The
bear
is th
e st
rong
est a
nim
al in
the
fore
st.
The
beet
le is
tini
er th
an th
e w
orm
.
The
hors
e ru
ns fa
ster
than
the
donk
ey.
That
dog
has
the
loud
est b
ark
in to
wn.
Sabr
ina’
s ra
bbit
is fl
uffie
r tha
n m
y ra
bbit.
The
dolp
hin
is th
e sm
arte
st o
f all
the
ocea
n an
imal
s.
The
cat i
s fri
endl
ier t
oday
than
it w
as y
este
rday
.
We
have
the
cute
st p
et o
n th
e bl
ock.
59G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_059
.indd
598/
29/0
67:
21:2
1PM
32 Student Edition pp. 58–59
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 32RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 32 10/4/06 9:19:03 PM10/4/06 9:19:03 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eA
dje
ctiv
es T
hat
C
om
par
e
Less
on
17
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Use
mor
e o
r th
e m
ost
corr
ectl
y b
efo
re e
ach
ad
ject
ive.
1.
Thes
e be
rrie
s ar
e d
elic
ious
tha
n th
ose
berr
ies.
2.
The
cher
ry t
ree
is
bea
utifu
l of t
he t
hree
tre
es.
3.
This
hik
e is
d
iffic
ult
than
the
last
hik
e.
4.
A h
urric
ane
is
frig
hten
ing
than
a r
ains
torm
.
5.
Thun
der
mak
es
ter
rifyi
ng s
ound
of a
ll.
6.
This
is
won
derf
ul s
unris
e th
at I
have
eve
r se
en.
7.
The
haw
k is
p
ower
ful b
ird in
the
fore
st.
8.
This
lake
has
u
nusu
al fi
sh in
the
sta
te.
9.
This
fore
st is
e
norm
ous
than
the
Bla
ck H
ills
Nat
iona
l For
est.
10.
This
sto
ry is
in
tere
stin
g on
e I h
ave
ever
rea
d.
Thes
e be
rrie
s ar
e m
ore
delic
ious
than
thos
e be
rrie
s.
The
cher
ry tr
ee is
the
mos
t bea
utifu
l of t
he th
ree
trees
.
This
hik
e is
mor
e di
fficu
lt th
an th
e la
st h
ike.
A hu
rric
ane
is m
ore
frigh
teni
ng th
an a
rain
stor
m.
Thun
der m
akes
the
mos
t ter
rifyi
ng s
ound
of a
ll.
This
is th
e m
ost w
onde
rful s
unris
e th
at I
have
eve
r see
n.
The
haw
k is
the
mos
t pow
erfu
l bird
in th
e fo
rest
.
This
lake
has
the
mos
t unu
sual
fish
in th
e st
ate.
This
fore
st is
mor
e en
orm
ous
than
the
Blac
k Hi
lls N
atio
nal F
ores
t.
This
sto
ry is
the
mos
t int
eres
ting
one
I hav
e ev
er re
ad.
60G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_060
.indd
608/
29/0
67:
22:2
1PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
17
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft.
Then
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) M
y bro
ther
is
old
er t
han
I a
m. (2
) He
took
me
cam
pin
g in
a b
ig
fore
st l
ast
wee
ken
d. (3
) Th
e fo
rest
was
th
e bea
uti
ful
pla
ce t
hat
I h
ave
ever
vis
ited
. (4) T
he
tree
s w
ere
tall
th
an m
y h
ouse
. (5) I
n t
he
morn
ing
we
saw
a b
row
n b
ear.
(6) I
was
sca
red
th
an m
y bro
ther
, an
d m
y sc
ream
was
t
han
his
!
1.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
the
corr
ect
form
of a
n ad
ject
ive
that
com
par
es?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 2
CSe
nten
ce 3
DSe
nten
ce 4
2.
Whi
ch a
djec
tive
need
s th
e en
ding
-er?
Abe
autif
ul (
Sent
ence
3)
Bta
ll (S
ente
nce
4)C
brow
n (S
ente
nce
5)D
scar
ed (
Sent
ence
6)
3.
Whi
ch a
djec
tive
need
s th
e w
ord
mor
e be
fore
it?
Aol
der
(Sen
tenc
e 1)
Bbi
g (S
ente
nce
2)C
beau
tiful
(Se
nten
ce 3
)D
scar
ed (
Sent
ence
6)
4. W
hich
adj
ectiv
e ne
eds
the
wor
dm
ost
befo
re it
?A
olde
r (S
ente
nce
1)B
beau
tiful
(Se
nten
ce 3
)C
brow
n (S
ente
nce
5)D
scar
ed (
Sent
ence
6)
5.
Whi
ch a
re t
he c
orre
ct a
djec
tives
th
at c
ompa
re fo
r th
e ad
ject
ive
big
in S
ente
nce
2?A
bigg
er, b
igge
stB
big,
big
gest
Cm
ore
big,
mos
t bi
gD
mor
e bi
gger
, mos
t bi
gges
t
6.
Whi
ch is
the
BES
T w
ay t
o co
mp
lete
Sen
tenc
e 6?
Am
ore
loud
Bm
ost
loud
C
loud
erD
loud
est
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
C
on
nec
tio
n
61G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_061
.indd
618/
29/0
66:
49:1
5PM
33 Student Edition pp. 60–61
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 33RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 33 10/4/06 9:19:05 PM10/4/06 9:19:05 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e A
dje
ctiv
es T
hat
C
om
par
e
Less
on
17
Wri
te t
he
form
of
each
ad
ject
ive
that
co
mp
ares
tw
o t
hin
gs.
Th
en w
rite
th
e fo
rm t
hat
co
mp
ares
th
ree
or
mo
re t
hin
gs.
1.
pla
yful
2.
funn
y
3.
afra
id
4.
imp
orta
nt
5.
high
6.
exci
ting
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
co
rrec
tly.
7.
The
racc
oon
was
sm
all t
han
the
fox.
8.
Toda
y’s
suns
et w
as lo
vely
tha
n ye
ster
day’
s su
nset
.
9.
That
clif
f was
the
mos
t st
eep
one
I ha
ve e
ver
clim
bed.
10.
The
river
was
mor
e de
eper
tha
n th
e st
ream
.
mor
e pl
ayfu
l, m
ost p
layf
ul
funn
ier,
funn
iest
mor
e af
raid
, mos
t afra
id
mor
e im
porta
nt, m
ost i
mpo
rtant
high
er, h
ighe
st
mor
e ex
citin
g, m
ost e
xciti
ng
The
racc
oon
was
sm
alle
r tha
n th
e fo
x.
Toda
y’s
suns
et w
as lo
velie
r tha
n ye
ster
day’
s su
nset
.
That
clif
f was
the
stee
pest
one
I ha
ve e
ver c
limbe
d.
The
river
was
dee
per t
han
the
stre
am.
62G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_062
.indd
62
8/29
/06
6:5
0:15
PM
Nam
eA
rtic
les
Less
on
18
Wri
te t
he
arti
cle
in e
ach
sen
ten
ce a
nd
th
e n
oun
it
intr
od
uces
.
1.
Ang
ela
wen
t to
the
city
.
2.
She
visi
ted
a fr
iend
.
3.
Ang
ela’
s fr
iend
live
d in
an
apar
tmen
t.
4.
They
too
k th
e bu
s.
5.
They
wen
t to
a m
useu
m.
6.
They
saw
a p
aint
ing.
7.
It h
ad a
fram
e.
8.
Chi
ldre
n p
laye
d in
the
gra
ss.
9.
A b
ird a
te p
iece
s of
bre
ad.
10.
The
man
pla
yed
his
viol
in.
11.
The
frie
nds
wen
t ho
me.
12.
They
too
k a
trai
n.
Fin
d f
ou
r se
nte
nce
s th
at u
se a
rtic
les
in a
bo
ok
or
a m
agaz
ine.
Co
py
the
sen
ten
ces.
Cir
cle
the
arti
cles
. Dra
w a
n a
rro
w f
rom
eac
h a
rtic
le t
o t
he
no
un
it in
tro
du
ces.
the
city
a fri
end
an a
partm
ent
the
bus
a m
useu
m
a pa
intin
g
a fra
me
the
gras
s
A bi
rd
The
man
The
frien
ds
a tra
in
Acce
pt re
ason
able
resp
onse
s.
63G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_063
.indd
638/
29/0
66:
50:4
5PM
34 Student Edition pp. 62–63
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 34RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 34 10/4/06 9:19:06 PM10/4/06 9:19:06 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eA
rtic
les
Less
on
18
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Use
a o
r an
to
fill
in
the
bla
nk.
1.
Jess
ie’s
old
er s
iste
r is
a
rtis
t.
2.
She
is m
akin
g c
lay
scul
ptu
re.
3.
Jeff
buys
pap
er a
nd
box
of p
aint
s.
4.
He
draw
s so
me
squa
res
and
ova
l.
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Use
a,a
n, o
r th
e to
fill
in t
he
bla
nk.
5.
Seve
ral p
aint
ings
han
g on
w
hite
wal
ls.
6.
Abe
is
exc
elle
nt p
aint
er.
7.
This
is
big
gest
mus
eum
.
8.
You
need
som
e p
aper
and
p
enci
l for
dra
win
g.
9.
you
ng a
rtis
ts w
ill h
ave
an a
rt s
how
.
Jess
ie’s
old
er s
iste
r is
an a
rtist
.
She
is m
akin
g a
clay
scu
lptu
re.
Jeff
buys
pap
er a
nd a
box
of p
aint
s.
He d
raw
s so
me
squa
res
and
an o
val.
Seve
ral p
aint
ings
han
g on
the
whi
te w
alls
.
Abe
is a
n ex
celle
nt p
aint
er.
This
is th
e bi
gges
t mus
eum
.
You
need
som
e pa
per a
nd a
pen
cil f
or d
raw
ing.
The
youn
g ar
tists
will
hav
e an
art
show
.
64G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_064
.indd
648/
29/0
66:
51:3
4PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
18
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft.
Then
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) M
y au
nt
live
s in
h
ouse
in
th
e co
un
try.
I v
isit
ed h
er l
ast
wee
ken
d. (2
) On
Sat
urd
ay w
e sa
w a
ow
l. (3)
o
wl
was
in
a t
ree.
(4) O
n S
un
day
we
rod
e a
trac
tor
and
pic
ked
ap
ple
s. (5
) My
aun
t
mad
e bak
ed a
pp
les
that
nig
ht. (6
) a
pp
les
wer
e d
elic
ious.
1.
Whi
ch o
f the
se s
ente
nces
has
an
art
icle
tha
t is
use
d co
rrec
tly?
ASe
nten
ce 2
BSe
nten
ce 4
CSe
nten
ce 5
DSe
nten
ce 6
2.
In
whi
ch s
ente
nce
shou
ld t
he
artic
lea
be c
hang
ed t
o an
?A
Sent
ence
2B
Sent
ence
3C
Sent
ence
4D
Sent
ence
6
3.
Whi
ch w
ord
shou
ld fi
ll in
the
bl
ank
in S
ente
nce
6?A
AB
An
CTh
eD
One
4.
Whi
ch w
ord
wou
ld B
EST
fill
in t
he b
lank
in S
ente
nce
1?A
aB
anC
the
Dse
vera
l
5.
Whi
ch w
ord
wou
ld B
EST
fill
in t
he b
lank
in S
ente
nce
3?A
AB
An
CTh
eD
Som
e
6.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
does
NO
T ha
ve a
n ar
ticle
?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
3C
Sent
ence
4D
Sent
ence
5
65G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_065
.indd
658/
29/0
67:
22:5
9PM
35 Student Edition pp. 64–65
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 35RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 35 10/4/06 9:19:07 PM10/4/06 9:19:07 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e A
rtic
les
Less
on
18
Use
th
e ar
ticl
es a
, an,
an
d t
he t
o w
rite
tw
o
sin
gul
ar f
orm
s o
f ea
ch p
lura
l no
un.
Exam
ples
: bi
rds:
a b
ird, t
he b
ird
icy
road
s: a
n ic
y ro
ad, t
he ic
y ro
ad
1.
skys
crap
ers
2.
elev
ator
s
3.
roof
top
s
4.
nois
y tr
ains
5.
esca
lato
rs
6.
shop
s
7.
airp
orts
8.
exci
ted
boys
9.
red
cars
Wri
te a
sen
ten
ce f
or
each
art
icle
. Cir
cle
the
arti
cle,
an
d u
nd
erlin
e th
e n
oun
th
at it
intr
od
uces
.
10.
a
11.
an
12.
the
a sk
yscr
aper
, the
sky
scra
per
an e
leva
tor,
the
elev
ator
a ro
ofto
p, th
e ro
ofto
p
a no
isy
train
, the
noi
sy tr
ain
an e
scal
ator
, the
esc
alat
or
a sh
op, t
he s
hop
an a
irpor
t, th
e ai
rpor
t
an e
xcite
d bo
y, th
e ex
cite
d bo
y
A bo
y w
alke
d hi
s do
g.
I saw
an
elep
hant
.
It’s
fun
to v
isit
the
big
city
.
a re
d ca
r, th
e re
d ca
r
Poss
ible
resp
onse
s ar
e sh
own.
66G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_066
.indd
66
8/29
/06
6:5
2:30
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eA
ctio
n V
erb
s
Less
on
19
Wri
te t
he
com
ple
te p
red
icat
e o
f ea
ch s
ente
nce
. U
nd
erlin
e th
e ac
tio
n v
erb
.
1.
The
wom
an w
alks
to
the
mar
ket.
2.
She
buys
frui
t an
d ve
geta
bles
.
3.
The
anim
als
gath
er in
the
yar
d.
4.
The
cow
s m
oo a
t th
e du
cks.
5.
The
sun
shin
es b
right
ly.
6.
The
wea
ther
rep
orte
r p
redi
cts
rain
.
7.
The
boy
help
s hi
s si
ster
.
8.
The
child
ren
eat
a go
od m
eal.
9.
I enj
oy t
he fo
lkta
le.
10.
We
disc
uss
the
char
acte
rs.
wal
ks to
the
mar
ket
buys
frui
t and
veg
etab
les
gath
er in
the
yard
moo
at t
he d
ucks
shin
es b
right
ly
pred
icts
rain
help
s hi
s si
ster
eat a
goo
d m
eal
enjo
y th
e fo
lkta
le
disc
uss
the
char
acte
rs
67G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_067
.indd
678/
29/0
66:
53:3
6PM
36 Student Edition pp. 66–67
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 36RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 36 10/4/06 9:19:09 PM10/4/06 9:19:09 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
68
Nam
eA
ctio
n V
erb
s
Less
on
19
Un
der
line
the
corr
ect
acti
on v
erb
in e
ach
sen
ten
ce.
1.
The
chic
ken
(lay/
lays
) fiv
e eg
gs.
2.
Ava
(wat
ch/w
atch
es)
the
little
chi
cks.
3.
I (p
lant
/pla
nts)
cor
n an
d to
mat
oes.
4.
He
(plo
w/p
low
s) t
he fi
eld.
5.
Chi
ldre
n (p
lay/
pla
ys)
near
the
bar
n.
6.
We
(sel
l/se
lls)
milk
and
che
ese.
7.
The
dog
(bar
k/ba
rks)
loud
ly.
Ch
oo
se a
n a
ctio
n v
erb
fro
m t
he
bo
x to
co
mp
lete
ea
ch s
ente
nce
. Th
en w
rite
th
e se
nte
nce
.
8.
The
chic
kens
in
the
dirt
.
9.
The
roos
ter
eve
ryon
e.
10.
We
a b
aske
t of
egg
s.
11.
Tyre
ll e
ggs
to t
he m
arke
t.
12.
She
feed
aro
und
the
yard
.
ta
kes
carr
y w
akes
sc
ratc
h
scat
ters
The
chic
kens
scr
atch
in th
e di
rt.
The
roos
ter w
akes
eve
ryon
e.
We
carr
y a
bask
et o
f egg
s.
Tyre
ll ta
kes
eggs
to th
e m
arke
t.
She
scat
ters
feed
aro
und
the
yard
.
Gra
mm
ar P
ract
ice
Bo
ok
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_068
.indd
688/
29/0
67:
25:1
3PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
19
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
C
on
nec
tio
n
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft.
Then
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) R
osa
liv
es i
n M
exic
o C
ity.
(2) S
he
socc
er. (3
) Sh
e
and
her
fat
her
wat
ch g
ames
toge
ther
on
TV
. (4) O
ne
Sun
day
th
ey r
ides
a bus
to a
gam
e at
a s
tad
ium
. (5) T
he
hom
e te
am w
ins.
(6) T
he
exci
ted
fan
s st
and
an
d c
hee
r.
1.
Whi
ch is
the
verb
in S
ente
nce
1?A
Rosa
Bliv
esC
inD
Mex
ico
2.
Whi
ch o
f the
se a
ctio
n ve
rbs
does
not
agr
ee w
ith it
s su
bjec
t?A
wat
ch (
Sent
ence
3)
Brid
es (
Sent
ence
4)
Cw
ins
(Sen
tenc
e 5)
Dst
and
(Sen
tenc
e 6)
3.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a si
ngul
ar
subj
ect
and
a ve
rb t
hat
agre
es?
ASe
nten
ce 2
BSe
nten
ce 3
CSe
nten
ce 5
DSe
nten
ce 6
4.
Whi
ch a
ctio
n ve
rb c
ould
co
mp
lete
Sen
tenc
e 2?
Alik
eB
enjo
yC
love
sD
pla
y
5.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
two
actio
n ve
rbs?
ASe
nten
ce 3
BSe
nten
ce 4
CSe
nten
ce 5
DSe
nten
ce 6
6.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a p
lura
l su
bjec
t an
d a
verb
tha
t ag
rees
?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
3C
Sent
ence
4D
Sent
ence
5
69G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_069
.indd
698/
29/0
67:
26:1
7PM
37 Student Edition pp. 68–69
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 37RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 37 10/4/06 9:19:10 PM10/4/06 9:19:10 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e A
ctio
n V
erb
s
Less
on
19
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Use
th
e co
rrec
t fo
rm o
f th
e ve
rb in
par
enth
eses
( )
.
1.
An
egg
(hat
ch/h
atch
es)
in t
he n
est.
2.
The
duck
lings
(fo
llow
/fol
low
s) t
heir
mot
her.
3.
The
farm
er (
hurr
y/hu
rrie
s) h
ome.
4.
Mic
e (s
curr
y/sc
urrie
s) a
roun
d th
e ba
rn.
5.
We
(milk
/milk
s) t
he c
ows
ever
y m
orni
ng.
6.
She
(driv
e/dr
ives
) th
e bi
g tr
acto
r.
7.
Jess
ica
(hel
p/h
elp
s) m
y br
othe
r dr
y di
shes
.
8.
They
(cl
ean/
clea
ns)
the
kitc
hen.
An e
gg h
atch
es in
the
nest
.
The
duck
lings
follo
w th
eir m
othe
r.
The
farm
er h
urrie
s ho
me.
Mic
e sc
urry
aro
und
the
barn
.
We
milk
the
cow
s ev
ery
mor
ning
.
She
driv
es th
e bi
g tra
ctor
.
Jess
ica
help
s m
y br
othe
r dry
dis
hes.
They
cle
an th
e ki
tche
n.
Gra
mm
ar P
ract
ice
Bo
ok
70
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_070
.indd
70
8/29
/06
6:5
5:03
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
20
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft.
Then
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) T
her
e w
as a
n a
rt s
how
at
the
libra
ry y
este
rday
. (2) C
hil
dre
n
dis
pla
yed
th
eir
art. (3
) I s
how
ed t
wo p
ain
tin
gs. (4
) Th
ey w
ere
the
larg
est
on
es i
n t
he
room
. (5) T
her
e w
ere
also
p
hoto
grap
hs
and
a b
lack
scu
lptu
re. (6
) Th
e sc
ulp
ture
was
in
tere
stin
g th
an t
he
ph
oto
grap
hs.
1.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
uses
the
co
rrec
t fo
rm o
f an
adje
ctiv
e th
at c
omp
ares
?A
Se
nten
ce 3
B
Sent
ence
4C
Se
nten
ce 5
D
Sent
ence
6
2.
Whi
ch a
djec
tive
need
s th
e w
ord
mor
e be
fore
it?
A
two
(Sen
tenc
e 3)
B
larg
est
(Sen
tenc
e 4)
C
blac
k (S
ente
nce
5)D
in
tere
stin
g (S
ente
nce
6)
3.
Whi
ch a
djec
tive
coul
d be
w
ritte
n be
fore
Chi
ldre
n in
Se
nten
ce 2
?A
M
any
B
One
C
Hun
dred
D
Each
4.
Whi
ch a
djec
tive
that
tel
ls w
hat
kind
cou
ld fi
ll in
the
bla
nk in
Se
nten
ce 5
?A
bi
gges
tB
tin
iest
C
smal
lD
so
me
5.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
an
adje
ctiv
e th
at t
ells
wha
t co
lor?
A
Sent
ence
1B
Se
nten
ce 3
C
Sent
ence
4D
Se
nten
ce 5
6.
Whi
ch o
f the
se s
ente
nces
doe
s N
OT
have
an
adje
ctiv
e?A
Se
nten
ce 2
B
Sent
ence
3C
Se
nten
ce 4
D
Sent
ence
5
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
71G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_071
.indd
71
8/29
/06
6:5
5:58
PM
38 Student Edition pp. 70–71
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 38RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 38 10/4/06 9:19:11 PM10/4/06 9:19:11 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
20
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft.
Then
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) L
uke
inte
rvie
ws
his
moth
er f
or
a n
ewsl
ette
r at
sch
ool.
(2) H
e
asks
his
moth
er q
ues
tion
s an
d w
rite
s d
ow
n a
an
swer
s. (3
)
ques
tion
s ar
e ab
out
his
moth
er’s
job.
(4) L
uke’
s m
oth
er i
s a
engi
nee
r.
(5) S
he
pla
ns
bri
dge
s, a
nd
peo
ple
buil
ds
them
. (6) S
tud
ents
en
joy
the
rep
ort
th
at L
uke
wri
tes.
1.
In
whi
ch s
ente
nce
shou
ld t
he
artic
le b
e ch
ange
d to
an?
A
Sent
ence
1B
Se
nten
ce 2
C
Sent
ence
4D
Se
nten
ce 6
2.
Whi
ch w
ord
coul
d fil
l in
the
blan
k in
Sen
tenc
e 3?
A
AB
A
nC
Th
eD
W
rites
3.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a p
lura
l no
un w
ith a
n ar
ticle
tha
t do
es
NO
T ag
ree?
A
Sent
ence
1B
Se
nten
ce 2
C
Sent
ence
4D
Se
nten
ce 6
4.
Whi
ch o
f the
se a
ctio
n ve
rbs
does
NO
T ag
ree
with
its
subj
ect?
A
inte
rvie
ws
(Sen
tenc
e 1)
B
writ
es (
Sent
ence
2)
C
pla
ns (
Sent
ence
5)
D
build
s (S
ente
nce
5)
5.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
only
one
ac
tion
verb
?A
Se
nten
ce 1
B
Sent
ence
2C
Se
nten
ce 5
D
Sent
ence
6
6.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a p
lura
l su
bjec
t an
d an
act
ion
verb
tha
t ag
rees
?A
Se
nten
ce 1
B
Sent
ence
2C
Se
nten
ce 4
D
Sent
ence
6
72G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_072
.indd
72
8/29
/06
7:2
7:01
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eTh
e V
erb
Be
Less
on
21
Wri
te t
he
form
of
the
verb
be
in e
ach
sen
ten
ce.
1.
Laur
a is
col
d w
ithou
t he
r ha
t.
2.
The
win
ter
was
long
.
3.
The
glov
es a
re o
n th
e ch
air.
4.
I am
war
mer
now
.
5.
The
girls
wer
e at
hom
e.
6.
Julio
is w
ith L
aura
.
7.
The
child
ren
are
at t
he s
katin
g rin
k.
8.
Thos
e bo
ys w
ere
good
ska
ters
.
9.
The
lake
is fr
ozen
thi
s m
orni
ng.
10.
The
gras
s is
cov
ered
with
sno
w.
11.
I am
tire
d at
the
end
of t
he d
ay.
12.
A h
uge
snow
ball
is n
ext
to t
he h
ouse
.
13.
It is
the
beg
inni
ng o
f a s
now
man
.
14.
We
wer
e ex
cite
d to
beg
in.
15.
I am
free
zing
out
side
.
Wri
te f
ou
r se
nte
nce
s ab
ou
t yo
ur
clas
sro
om
, usi
ng
th
e ve
rb b
e. U
se a
si
ng
ula
r su
bje
ct in
tw
o s
ente
nce
s an
d a
plu
ral s
ub
ject
in t
he
oth
er t
wo
. U
nd
erlin
e th
e fo
rms
of
the
verb
be.
Acce
pt re
ason
able
resp
onse
s.
is
was
are
am
wer
e
is
are
wer
e
is is am
is
is
wer
e
am
73G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_073
.indd
738/
29/0
66:
56:4
0PM
39 Student Edition pp. 72–73
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 39RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 39 10/4/06 9:19:12 PM10/4/06 9:19:12 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eTh
e V
erb
Be
Less
on
21
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Ch
oo
se t
he
corr
ect
form
o
f th
e ve
rb b
e in
par
enth
eses
( )
.
1.
It (
is, a
re)
sum
mer
.
2.
I (is
, am
) at
the
oce
an.
3.
We
(was
, wer
e) w
arm
in t
he s
un.
4.
He
(is, a
m)
in t
he w
ater
.
5.
They
(w
as, w
ere)
with
the
ir fr
iend
s.
6.
You
(is, a
re)
on a
bea
ch b
lank
et.
7.
I (w
as, a
re)
at t
he s
nack
bar
.
8.
It (
is, a
re)
next
to
a p
layg
roun
d.
9.
They
(is
, are
) on
the
sw
ings
.
10.
She
(is, a
re)
slee
py
at t
he e
nd o
f the
day
.
It is
sum
mer
.
I am
at t
he o
cean
.
We
wer
e w
arm
in th
e su
n.
He is
in th
e w
ater
.
They
wer
e w
ith th
eir f
riend
s.
You
are
on a
bea
ch b
lank
et.
I was
at t
he s
nack
bar
.
It is
nex
t to
a pl
aygr
ound
.
They
are
on
the
swin
gs.
She
is s
leep
y at
the
end
of th
e da
y.
74G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_074
.indd
748/
29/0
67:
28:1
2PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
21
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft. T
hen
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) M
y fr
ien
ds
and
I a
re a
t a
par
k. (2
) We
is v
ery
hap
py.
(3) F
low
ers
are
ever
ywh
ere.
(4) A
sq
uir
rel
in
a t
ree.
(5) I
sm
ile
at i
t. (6
) Sp
rin
g ar
e m
y fa
vori
te s
easo
n.
1.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a fo
rm o
f th
e ve
rb b
e th
at d
oes
NO
T ag
ree
with
the
sub
ject
?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
2C
Sent
ence
3D
Sent
ence
5
2.
Whi
ch d
oes
NO
T ha
ve a
form
of
the
ver
b be
?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
3C
Sent
ence
5D
Sent
ence
6
3.
Whi
ch c
ould
go
in t
he b
lank
in
Sent
ence
4?
Aam
Bis
Car
eD
wer
e
4.
How
sho
uld
the
form
of
the
verb
be
in S
ente
nce
6 be
writ
ten?
Aam
Bar
eC
wer
eD
is
5.
Whi
ch h
as a
form
of t
he
verb
be t
hat
links
the
sub
ject
to
wor
ds t
hat
tell
wha
t?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
3C
Sent
ence
5D
Sent
ence
6
6.
Whi
ch h
as a
form
of t
he
verb
be t
hat
links
the
sub
ject
to
wor
ds t
hat
tell
whe
re?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 2
CSe
nten
ce 5
DSe
nten
ce 6
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
75G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_075
.indd
758/
29/0
66:
57:1
8PM
40 Student Edition pp. 74–75
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 40RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 40 10/4/06 9:19:13 PM10/4/06 9:19:13 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e Th
e V
erb
Be
Less
on
21
Cir
cle
the
form
of
the
verb
be
in e
ach
sen
ten
ce.
Then
wri
te w
het
her
eac
h li
nks
th
e su
bje
ct t
o
wo
rds
that
tel
l wha
t o
r w
here
.
1.
Som
e se
als
are
whi
te.
2.
The
pen
guin
chi
ck w
as fu
zzy.
3.
You
wer
e on
the
sho
re.
4.
That
sha
rk is
nea
r a
wha
le.
5.
I am
with
my
par
ents
.
6.
They
are
sci
entis
ts.
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
, usi
ng
a c
orr
ect
form
of
the
verb
be.
Th
en
wri
te S
ab
ove
eac
h s
ing
ular
sub
ject
an
d P
ab
ove
eac
h p
lura
l sub
ject
.
7.
Thos
e fis
h s
mal
l and
silv
er.
8.
We
clo
se t
o th
e be
aver
’s d
am.
9.
He
in a
woo
den
boat
.
10.
The
river
fu
ll of
life
.Poss
ible
resp
onse
s ar
e sh
own.
Thos
e fis
h ar
e sm
all a
nd s
ilver
.
We
wer
e cl
ose
to th
e be
aver
’s d
am.
He w
as in
a w
oode
n bo
at.
The
river
is fu
ll of
life
.S
SP
P
wha
t
wha
t
wha
twhe
re whe
re
whe
re 76G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_076
.indd
76
8/29
/06
6:5
8:35
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eM
ain
an
d
Hel
pin
g V
erb
s
Less
on
22
Cir
cle
the
hel
pin
g v
erb
an
d u
nd
erlin
e th
e m
ain
ve
rb in
eac
h s
ente
nce
.
1.
Som
e bu
tter
flies
can
fly
long
dis
tanc
es.
2.
Mot
hs a
re a
ttra
cted
to
the
light
.
3.
The
mos
qui
to c
ould
bite
you
!
4.
We
have
see
n m
any
inse
cts
this
sum
mer
.
5.
She
will
stu
dy b
ees
at t
he li
brar
y.
6.
I am
writ
ing
a re
por
t on
lady
bugs
.
7.
The
bats
wer
e lo
okin
g fo
r fo
od.
8.
You
shou
ld w
atch
tha
t hu
mm
ingb
ird.
9.
The
duck
s ha
d flo
wn
sout
h fo
r th
e w
inte
r.
10.
An
eagl
e is
glid
ing
thro
ugh
the
sky.
11.
The
haw
k ha
s sp
otte
d a
mou
se.
12.
A p
arro
t m
ay li
ve fo
r 80
yea
rs.
Wri
te f
ou
r se
nte
nce
s ab
ou
t yo
ur
day
at
sch
oo
l, u
sin
g m
ain
an
d h
elp
ing
ve
rbs.
Cir
cle
the
hel
pin
g v
erb
s. U
nd
erlin
e th
e m
ain
ver
bs.
Acce
pt r
easo
nabl
e re
spon
ses.
77G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_077
.indd
778/
29/0
66:
59:2
9PM
41 Student Edition pp. 76–77
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 41RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 41 10/4/06 9:19:15 PM10/4/06 9:19:15 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eM
ain
an
d
Hel
pin
g V
erb
s
Less
on
22
Cir
cle
the
hel
pin
g v
erb
s, a
nd
un
der
line
the
mai
n v
erb
s.
1.
I did
not
wat
ch t
he s
unse
t.
2.
We
will
now
cha
nge
into
paj
amas
.
3.
I cou
ld n
ot s
ee t
he m
oon.
4.
It w
as h
idde
n be
hind
a c
loud
.
5.
They
wou
ld n
ot g
o to
bed
.
6.
The
baby
has
nev
er s
lep
t th
roug
h th
e ni
ght.
7.
The
dogs
wer
e al
read
y sl
eep
ing.
8.
Star
s ar
e sh
inin
g in
the
sky
.
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
, usi
ng
a h
elp
ing
ver
b f
rom
th
e b
ox.
9.
Mot
hs
fly
up t
o 25
mile
s p
er h
our.
10.
That
mot
h n
ot h
ave
spot
s on
its
win
gs.
11.
The
butt
erfly
w
alki
ng o
n a
leaf
.
12.
Thos
e bu
tter
flies
g
one
to M
exic
o fo
r th
e w
inte
r.
isd
oes
can
hav
e
Mot
hs c
an fl
y up
to 2
5 m
iles
per h
our.
That
mot
h do
es n
ot h
ave
spot
s on
its
win
gs.
The
butte
rfly
is w
alki
ng o
n a
leaf
.
Thos
e bu
tterfl
ies
have
gon
e to
Mex
ico
for t
he w
inte
r.
78G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_078
.indd
788/
29/0
67:
00:3
5PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
22
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft. T
hen
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) I
n h
er d
ream
s, M
and
y ca
n f
ly. (2
) Sh
e gl
idin
g ove
r
the
city
at
nig
ht. (3
) Th
e su
n h
ave
set. (4
) It
wil
l so
on
bec
om
e
dar
k. (5
) Man
dy
love
s h
er d
ream
. (6) S
he
wil
l fo
rget
it.
1.
Whi
ch h
as a
hel
pin
g ve
rb t
hat
does
NO
T ag
ree
with
the
su
bjec
t?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
2C
Sent
ence
3D
Sent
ence
4
2.
Whi
ch h
as a
mai
n ve
rb a
nd a
he
lpin
g ve
rb u
sed
corr
ectly
?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
2C
Sent
ence
3D
Sent
ence
5
3.
The
wor
d no
t sh
ould
follo
w
the
hel
pin
g ve
rb in
Sen
tenc
e 6.
Whe
re s
houl
d it
go?
Aaf
ter
She
Baf
ter
will
Caf
ter
forg
et
Daf
ter
it
4.
In
whi
ch s
ente
nce
shou
ld t
he
help
ing
verb
is g
o be
fore
the
m
ain
verb
?A
Sent
ence
2B
Sent
ence
4C
Sent
ence
5D
Sent
ence
6
5.
Whi
ch d
oes
NO
T ha
ve a
he
lpin
g ve
rb?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 4
CSe
nten
ce 5
DSe
nten
ce 6
6.
Whi
ch a
re t
he m
ain
and
help
ing
verb
s in
Sen
tenc
e 4?
Aw
ill a
nd s
oon
Bw
ill a
nd b
ecom
eC
soon
and
bec
ome
Dbe
com
e an
d da
rk
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
79G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_079
.indd
798/
29/0
67:
01:0
4PM
42 Student Edition pp. 78–79
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 42RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 42 10/4/06 9:19:17 PM10/4/06 9:19:17 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e M
ain
an
d
Hel
pin
g V
erb
s
Less
on
22
Rew
rite
th
e se
nte
nce
s. A
dd
a h
elp
ing
ver
b t
o
each
on
e.
1.
I nev
er s
tudi
ed m
amm
als.
2.
We
lear
n ab
out
bats
.
3.
We
go t
o th
e lib
rary
.
4.
Butt
erfli
es s
ee r
ed, y
ello
w, a
nd g
reen
.
5.
A b
utte
rfly
land
ed o
n th
at le
af.
6.
That
but
terf
ly la
id 4
00 e
ggs.
7.
Butt
erfli
es fl
y on
ly w
hen
they
are
war
m.
8.
The
libra
rian
foun
d a
grea
t bo
ok a
bout
but
terf
lies.
Poss
ible
resp
onse
s ar
e sh
own.
I hav
e ne
ver s
tudi
ed m
amm
als.
We
will
lear
n ab
out b
ats.
We
shou
ld g
o to
the
libra
ry.
Butte
rflie
s ca
n se
e re
d, y
ello
w, a
nd g
reen
.
A bu
tterfl
y ha
s la
nded
on
that
leaf
.
That
but
terfl
y ha
s la
id 4
00 e
ggs.
Butte
rflie
s w
ill fl
y on
ly w
hen
they
are
war
m.
The
libra
rian
has
foun
d a
grea
t boo
k ab
out b
utte
rflie
s.
80G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_080
.indd
80
8/29
/06
7:0
2:16
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
ePr
esen
t-Te
nse
Ver
bs
Less
on
23
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Use
th
e co
rrec
t p
rese
nt-
ten
se f
orm
of
the
verb
in p
aren
thes
es (
).
1.
I (he
lp)
my
fam
ily.
2.
My
sist
er (
pla
nt)
carr
ot s
eeds
.
3.
We
(wor
k) t
oget
her
in t
he g
arde
n.
4.
My
brot
her
(pic
k) t
omat
oes.
5.
My
mot
her
(car
ry)
them
insi
de.
6.
My
fath
er (
was
h) t
he t
omat
oes.
7.
He
(slic
e) t
hem
into
sm
all p
iece
s.
8.
I (m
ake)
a s
alad
for
dinn
er.
9.
A fr
iend
(ea
t) w
ith u
s.
10.
She
(enj
oy)
the
sala
d.
I hel
p m
y fa
mily
.
My
sist
er p
lant
s ca
rrot
see
ds.
We
wor
k to
geth
er in
the
gard
en.
My
brot
her p
icks
tom
atoe
s.
My
mot
her c
arrie
s th
em in
side
.
My
fath
er w
ashe
s th
e to
mat
oes.
He s
lices
them
into
sm
all p
iece
s.
I mak
e a
sala
d fo
r din
ner.
A fri
end
eats
with
us.
She
enjo
ys th
e sa
lad.
81G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_081
.indd
818/
29/0
67:
03:2
2PM
43 Student Edition pp. 80–81
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 43RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 43 10/4/06 9:19:18 PM10/4/06 9:19:18 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
ePr
esen
t-Te
nse
Ver
bs
Less
on
23
Wri
te t
he
verb
in e
ach
sen
ten
ce. T
hen
wri
te S
if
the
sub
ject
is s
ing
ular
or
P if
th
e su
bje
ct is
plu
ral.
1.
We
pla
n a
pic
nic.
2.
I mak
e sa
ndw
iche
s.
3.
A d
ish
brea
ks.
4.
Lila
fixe
s it
with
glu
e.
5.
The
child
ren
eat
unde
r a
tree
.
6.
Tere
sa h
ears
thu
nder
.
7.
They
put
the
food
aw
ay.
8.
She
runs
hom
e.
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Use
th
e co
rrec
t p
rese
nt-
ten
se f
orm
of
the
verb
in p
aren
thes
es (
).
9.
Leah
(lik
e) t
his
book
.
10.
The
prin
ce (
mar
ry)
the
prin
cess
.
11.
He
(writ
e) a
fair
y ta
le.
12.
We
(enj
oy)
the
stor
y.
Leah
like
s th
is b
ook.
The
prin
ce m
arrie
s th
e pr
ince
ss.
He w
rites
a fa
iry
tale
.
We
enjo
y th
e st
ory.
plan
, P
mak
e, S
brea
ks, S fix
es, S
eat,
P
hear
s, S
put,
P
runs
, S 82G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_082
.indd
828/
29/0
67:
04:0
9PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
23
(1) M
y fa
ther
an
d I
mak
e a
cake
for
my
bro
ther
’s bir
thd
ay.
(2) I
mix
th
e in
gred
ien
ts. (3
) My
fath
er b
ake
the
cake
in t
he
ove
n. (4
) We
ices
it
toge
ther
. (5) M
y bro
ther
t
he
cake
at h
is p
arty
. (6)
love
s it
.
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft. T
hen
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
1.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a si
ngul
ar s
ubje
ct a
nd a
cor
rect
p
rese
nt-t
ense
ver
b?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
2C
Sent
ence
3D
Sent
ence
4
2.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a si
ngul
ar
subj
ect
and
an in
corr
ect
pre
sent
-ten
se v
erb?
A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
2C
Sent
ence
3D
Sent
ence
4
3.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a p
lura
l sub
ject
and
a c
orre
ct
pre
sent
-ten
se v
erb?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 2
CSe
nten
ce 3
DSe
nten
ce 4
4.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a p
lura
l su
bjec
t an
d an
inco
rrec
t p
rese
nt-t
ense
ver
b?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
2C
Sent
ence
3D
Sent
ence
4
5.
Whi
ch is
a p
rese
nt-t
ense
ver
b th
at c
ould
fill
in t
he b
lank
in
Sent
ence
5?
Aea
ting
Bea
tC
eats
Dat
e
6.
Whi
ch s
ubje
ct c
ould
fill
in t
he
blan
k in
Sen
tenc
e 6?
AH
eB
We
CH
e an
d hi
s fr
iend
sD
My
brot
her’s
frie
nds
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
83G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_083
.indd
838/
29/0
67:
04:4
5PM
44 Student Edition pp. 82–83
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 44RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 44 10/4/06 9:19:19 PM10/4/06 9:19:19 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e Pr
esen
t-Te
nse
Ver
bs
Less
on
23
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
co
rrec
tly,
usi
ng
th
e su
bje
ct in
par
enth
eses
( )
. Be
sure
th
at t
he
verb
in
yo
ur s
ente
nce
ag
rees
wit
h it
s n
ew s
ubje
ct.
Exam
ple:
G
lend
a lik
es m
ath.
(M
y br
othe
rs)
1.
I ent
er a
writ
ing
cont
est.
(G
eorg
e)
2.
The
teac
hers
judg
e th
e co
ntes
t. (
A t
each
er)
3.
One
stu
dent
win
s th
e co
ntes
t. (
Two
stud
ents
)
4.
We
like
stor
ies
abou
t an
imal
s. (
You)
5.
She
pre
fers
tru
e st
orie
s. (
He)
6.
The
prin
cess
es m
eet
a p
rince
. (Th
e p
rince
ss)
7.
We
hurr
y ho
me
from
sch
ool.
(The
y)
8.
Our
mot
her
open
s th
e fr
ont
door
. (W
e)
My
brot
hers
like
mat
h.
Geor
ge e
nter
s a
writ
ing
cont
est.
A te
ache
r jud
ges
the
cont
est.
Two
stud
ents
win
the
cont
est.
You
like
stor
ies
abou
t ani
mal
s.
He p
refe
rs tr
ue s
torie
s.
The
prin
cess
mee
ts a
prin
ce.
They
hur
ry h
ome
from
sch
ool.
We
open
the
front
doo
r.
84G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_084
.indd
84
8/29
/06
7:0
6:33
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
ePa
st-T
ense
an
d
Futu
re-T
ense
Ver
bs
Less
on
24
Wri
te t
he
verb
in e
ach
sen
ten
ce. T
hen
lab
el it
as
pres
ent,
pas
t, o
r fu
ture
ten
se.
1.
Jen
finis
hes
her
hom
ewor
k q
uick
ly.
2.
Sim
on w
ill w
rite
an e
ssay
nex
t w
eek.
3.
The
teac
her
assi
gned
five
mat
h p
robl
ems.
4.
You
carr
ied
a di
ctio
nary
to
scho
ol.
5.
Stud
ents
will
rea
d th
eir
rep
orts
alo
ud.
6.
Jaso
n dr
aws
a p
ictu
re in
art
cla
ss.
7.
We
trie
d th
e sc
ienc
e ex
per
imen
t at
hom
e.
8.
The
child
ren
nam
ed t
hree
kin
ds o
f pla
nts.
9.
My
sist
er le
arns
Sp
anis
h in
hig
h sc
hool
.
10.
I will
ask
my
mot
her
for
help
.
finis
hes;
pre
sent
will
writ
e; fu
ture
assi
gned
; pas
t
carr
ied;
pas
t
will
read
; fut
ure
draw
s; p
rese
nt
tried
; pas
t
nam
ed; p
ast
lear
ns; p
rese
nt
will
ask
; fut
ure
85G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_085
.indd
858/
29/0
67:
07:3
6PM
45 Student Edition pp. 84–85
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 45RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 45 10/4/06 9:19:20 PM10/4/06 9:19:20 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
ePa
st-T
ense
an
d
Futu
re-T
ense
Ver
bs
Less
on
24
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Use
th
e fu
ture
-ten
se
form
of
the
verb
in p
aren
thes
es (
).
1.
Yola
nda
(sta
y) h
ome
from
sch
ool t
oday
.
2.
She
(go)
to
the
doct
or la
ter.
3.
The
doct
or (
give
) he
r so
me
med
icin
e.
4.
She
(fee
l) m
uch
bett
er t
omor
row
.
Wri
te a
sen
ten
ce t
hat
use
s th
e fu
ture
-ten
se f
orm
of
the
verb
.
5.
run
6.
pla
y
7.
hurr
y
8.
wat
ch
Yola
nda
will
sta
y ho
me
from
sch
ool t
oday
.
She
will
go
to th
e do
ctor
late
r.
The
doct
or w
ill g
ive
her s
ome
med
icin
e.
She
will
feel
muc
h be
tter t
omor
row
.
Poss
ible
resp
onse
s ar
e sh
own.
I will
run
in th
e pa
rk.
Mel
issa
will
pla
y w
ith h
er fr
iend
.
My
mot
her w
ill h
urry
hom
e.
We
will
wat
ch a
mov
ie la
ter.
86G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_086
.indd
868/
29/0
67:
08:4
0PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
24
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft. T
hen
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) P
aul
all
wee
k f
or
tod
ay’s
mat
h t
est. (2
) Soon
he
take
the
test
. (3) H
e cl
ears
his
des
k. (4
) His
tea
cher
han
ds
him
th
e te
st s
hee
t. (5
) Sh
e sm
iles
an
d s
ays
“Good
luck
.” (6
) Pau
l
work
ed h
ard
, an
d h
e w
ill
do w
ell
on
th
e te
st.
1.
Whi
ch v
erb
form
BES
T co
mp
lete
s Se
nten
ce 1
?A
stud
yB
will
stu
dyC
stud
ied
Dst
udie
s
2.
Whi
ch v
erb
need
s th
e he
lpin
g ve
rbw
ill t
o m
ake
it a
corr
ect
futu
re-t
ense
ver
b?A
take
(Se
nten
ce 2
)B
clea
rs (
Sent
ence
3)
Csm
iles
(Sen
tenc
e 5)
Dw
orke
d (S
ente
nce
6)
3.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
does
NO
T ha
ve a
pre
sent
-ten
se v
erb?
ASe
nten
ce 3
BSe
nten
ce 4
CSe
nten
ce 5
DSe
nten
ce 6
4.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
two
corr
ect
pre
sent
-ten
se v
erbs
?A
Sent
ence
3B
Sent
ence
4C
Sent
ence
5D
Sent
ence
6
5.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a co
rrec
t p
ast-
tens
e ve
rb?
ASe
nten
ce 2
BSe
nten
ce 3
CSe
nten
ce 5
DSe
nten
ce 6
6.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a co
rrec
t fu
ture
-ten
se v
erb?
ASe
nten
ce 3
BSe
nten
ce 4
CSe
nten
ce 5
DSe
nten
ce 6
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
87G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_087
.indd
878/
29/0
67:
09:0
3PM
46 Student Edition pp. 86–87
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 46RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 46 10/4/06 9:19:21 PM10/4/06 9:19:21 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e Pa
st-T
ense
an
d
Futu
re-T
ense
Ver
bs
Less
on
24
Un
der
line
the
verb
in e
ach
sen
ten
ce. T
hen
re
wri
te t
he
sen
ten
ce in
th
e te
nse
sh
ow
nin
par
enth
eses
( )
.
1.
The
child
ren
stud
y q
uiet
ly. (
pas
t)
2.
The
teac
her
will
tal
k ab
out
the
rep
ort.
(p
ast)
3.
Man
y st
uden
ts e
njoy
ed m
usic
cla
ss. (
pre
sent
)
4.
Mr.
Gre
en s
core
s th
e te
st. (
futu
re)
5.
Tim
will
hur
ry t
o sc
hool
. (p
rese
nt)
6.
We
pla
y ou
tsid
e du
ring
rece
ss. (
pas
t)
7.
You
solv
ed t
he m
ath
pro
blem
. (fu
ture
)
8.
Mis
ha p
ract
ices
the
flut
e. (
pas
t)
The
child
ren
stud
ied
quie
tly.
The
teac
her t
alke
d ab
out t
he re
port.
Man
y st
uden
ts e
njoy
mus
ic c
lass
.
Mr.
Gree
n w
ill s
core
the
test
.
Tim
hur
ries
to s
choo
l.
We
play
ed o
utsi
de d
urin
g re
cess
.
You
will
sol
ve th
e m
ath
prob
lem
.
Mis
ha p
ract
iced
the
flute
.
88G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_088
.indd
88
8/29
/06
7:1
0:12
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
25
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft. T
hen
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) M
ia a
nd
Sim
on w
riti
ng
a st
ory
. (2) T
he
story
are
about
a ro
bot.
(3) T
he
robot
is
fun
ny.
(4) I
t s
ay a
ll s
ort
s of
thin
gs. (5
) Th
e
chil
dre
n a
re e
xcit
ed. (6
) Th
ey w
ill sh
ow
th
e st
ory
to t
hei
r te
ach
er.
1.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a si
ngul
ar
subj
ect
and
the
corr
ect
form
of
the
verb
be?
A
Sent
ence
2B
Se
nten
ce 3
C
Sent
ence
5D
Se
nten
ce 6
2.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a p
lura
l su
bjec
t an
d th
e co
rrec
t fo
rm o
f th
e ve
rb b
e?A
Se
nten
ce 2
B
Sent
ence
3C
Se
nten
ce 5
D
Sent
ence
6
3.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a fo
rm o
f th
e ve
rb b
e th
at d
oes
not
agre
e w
ith t
he s
ubje
ct?
A
Sent
ence
2B
Se
nten
ce 3
C
Sent
ence
5D
Se
nten
ce 6
4.
Whi
ch h
elp
ing
verb
sho
uld
go b
efor
e th
e m
ain
verb
in
Sent
ence
1?
A
have
B
will
C
can
D
are
5.
Whi
ch h
elp
ing
verb
cou
ld
com
ple
te S
ente
nce
4?A
ha
veB
ha
dC
ca
nD
is
6.
Whi
ch o
ther
hel
pin
g ve
rb c
ould
rep
lace
will
in
Sen
tenc
e 6?
A
had
B
can
C
have
D
wer
e
89G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_089
.indd
89
8/29
/06
7:2
9:00
PM
47 Student Edition pp. 88–89
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 47RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 47 10/4/06 9:19:22 PM10/4/06 9:19:22 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
25
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft. T
hen
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) W
illi
am l
ove
s sp
ace.
(2) H
e lo
oked
at
pic
ture
s of
the
sun
and
moon
wh
en h
e w
as y
oun
ger.
(3) N
ow
he
read
books
about
the
sola
r sy
stem
. (4) H
e w
ill
lear
n a
bout
the
pla
net
s. (5
) He
wil
l
stud
ies
spac
e tr
avel
. (6) O
ne
day
he
wil
l bec
om
e an
ast
ron
aut.
1.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a co
rrec
t p
ast-
tens
e ve
rb?
A
Sent
ence
1B
Se
nten
ce 2
C
Sent
ence
4D
Se
nten
ce 5
2.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a co
rrec
t p
rese
nt-t
ense
ver
b?A
Se
nten
ce 1
B
Sent
ence
2C
Se
nten
ce 3
D
Sent
ence
4
3.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
an
inco
rrec
t fo
rm o
f a
futu
re-t
ense
ver
b?A
Se
nten
ce 2
B
Sent
ence
4C
Se
nten
ce 5
D
Sent
ence
6
4.
Whi
ch v
erb
shou
ld e
nd w
ith
an s
?A
lo
oked
(Se
nten
ce 2
)B
re
ad (
Sent
ence
3)
C
lear
n (S
ente
nce
4)D
be
com
e (S
ente
nce
6)
5.
Whi
ch is
the
futu
re-t
ense
form
of
the
ver
b in
Sen
tenc
e 1?
A
love
B
will
love
C
will
love
sD
lo
ved
6.
Whi
ch is
the
pas
t-te
nse
form
of
the
verb
in S
ente
nce
4?A
le
arn
B
lear
nsC
ca
n le
arn
D
lear
ned
90G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_090
.indd
90
8/29
/06
7:1
0:52
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eIr
reg
ula
r V
erb
s
Less
on
26
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Use
th
e ve
rb a
nd
ten
se
sho
wn
in p
aren
thes
es (
).
1.
I a
sp
ider
yes
terd
ay. (
see—
pas
t te
nse)
2.
The
spid
er
hom
e to
its
web
. (go
—p
ast
tens
e)
3.
Shon
dra
a p
et s
pid
er. (
have
—p
ast
tens
e)
4.
Zac
k t
hat
he li
kes
spid
ers.
(sa
y—p
rese
nt t
ense
)
5.
A s
pide
r s
ever
al t
hing
s to
cat
ch in
sect
s. (
do—
pres
ent
tens
e)
6.
A fl
y t
o th
e sp
ider
’s w
eb. (
com
e—p
rese
nt t
ense
)
7.
That
sp
ider
(
have
—p
rese
nt t
ense
) a
stic
ky w
eb.
8.
The
spid
er
(do
—p
ast
tens
e) it
s w
ork
qui
ckly
.
Poss
ible
repo
nses
ar
e sh
own.
I saw
a s
pide
r yes
terd
ay.
The
spid
er w
ent h
ome
to it
s w
eb.
Shon
dra
had
a pe
t spi
der.
Zack
say
s th
at h
e lik
es s
pide
rs
A sp
ider
doe
s se
vera
l thi
ngs
to c
atch
inse
cts.
A fly
com
es to
the
spid
er’s
web
.
That
spi
der h
as a
stic
ky w
eb.
The
spid
er d
id it
s w
ork
quic
kly.
91G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_091
.indd
918/
29/0
67:
11:5
3PM
48 Student Edition pp. 90–91
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 48RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 48 10/4/06 9:19:23 PM10/4/06 9:19:23 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eIr
reg
ula
r V
erb
s
Less
on
26
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
, usi
ng
th
e co
rrec
t p
rese
nt-
ten
se v
erb
in p
aren
thes
es (
).
1.
The
tired
pig
(lie
s, la
ys)
in t
he g
rass
.
2.
The
sun
(ris
es, r
aise
s) o
ver
the
field
.
3.
The
farm
er (
sits
, set
s) h
er b
ucke
t on
a s
tool
.
4.
He
(lies
, lay
s) a
bla
nket
ove
r th
e ho
rse.
5.
We
(sit,
set
) to
geth
er u
nder
an
app
le t
ree.
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Use
th
e p
ast-
ten
se f
orm
of
the
verb
sh
ow
n
in p
aren
thes
es (
).
6.
Gw
en
in t
he s
un a
ll af
tern
oon.
(lie
)
7.
The
child
ren
ear
ly fo
r sc
hool
. (ris
e)
8.
You
the
egg
s on
the
tab
le. (
set)
9.
The
hen
man
y eg
gs. (
lay)
The
tired
pig
lies
in th
e gr
ass.
The
sun
rises
ove
r the
fiel
d.
The
farm
er s
ets
her b
ucke
t on
a st
ool.
He la
ys a
bla
nket
ove
r the
hor
se.
We
sit t
oget
her u
nder
an
appl
e tre
e.
Gwen
lay
in th
e su
n al
l afte
rnoo
n.
The
child
ren
rose
ear
ly fo
r sch
ool.
You
set t
he e
ggs
on th
e ta
ble.
The
hen
laid
man
y eg
gs. 92
Gra
mm
ar P
ract
ice
Bo
ok
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_092
.indd
928/
29/0
67:
12:5
4PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eG
ram
mar
–Wri
tin
gC
on
nec
tio
n
Less
on
26
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft. T
hen
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) T
he
sun
ris
en, a
nd
it
was
a b
eauti
ful
morn
ing.
(2) N
ath
an
in
th
e gr
ass.
(3) H
e w
atch
ed a
s th
ree
dee
r ca
me
to t
he
rive
r.
(4) N
ath
an s
aw t
he
dee
r d
rin
k. (5
) He
say
noth
ing,
bec
ause
he
did
not
wan
t to
sca
re t
hem
. (6) W
hen
th
e d
eer
had
fin
ish
ed d
rin
kin
g, N
ath
an
to h
is f
eet
and
wal
ked
quie
tly
hom
e.
1.
Whi
ch v
erb
form
cou
ld g
o in
th
e bl
ank
in S
ente
nce
2?A
lays
Bla
idC
lain
Dla
y
2.
Whi
ch is
the
pre
sent
-ten
se
form
of t
he v
erb
saw
in
Sent
ence
4?
Adi
d se
enB
had
seen
Cha
d se
eD
sees
3.
Whi
ch is
a c
orre
ct p
ast-
tens
e ve
rb t
o re
pla
ce t
he u
nder
lined
ve
rb in
Sen
tenc
e 5?
Asa
ysB
saye
dC
said
Dsa
ying
4.
Whi
ch v
erb
need
s th
e he
lpin
g ve
rbha
d be
fore
it?
Aris
en (
Sent
ence
1)
Bsa
w (
Sent
ence
4)
Cdr
ink
(Sen
tenc
e 4)
Dsc
are
(Sen
tenc
e 5)
5.
Whi
ch a
re t
he p
rese
nt-t
ense
fo
rms
of t
he v
erbs
in
Sent
ence
3?
Aw
atch
es, c
ome
Bdi
d w
atch
, had
com
eC
had
wat
ched
, had
com
eD
will
wat
ch, w
ill c
ome
6.
Whi
ch v
erb
form
cou
ld g
o in
th
e bl
ank
in S
ente
nce
6?A
rise
Bro
seC
rais
eD
rais
ed
93G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_093
.indd
938/
29/0
67:
13:1
1PM
49 Student Edition pp. 92–93
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 49RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 49 10/4/06 9:19:25 PM10/4/06 9:19:25 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e Ir
reg
ula
r V
erb
s
Less
on
26
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
, usi
ng
th
e ve
rb t
ense
in
par
enth
eses
( )
.
1.
The
spid
er la
id e
ggs.
(p
rese
nt t
ense
)
2.
I hav
e tw
o bo
oks
on s
pid
ers.
(p
ast
tens
e)
3.
The
farm
er’s
dau
ghte
r ha
d do
ne h
er c
hore
s. (
pre
sent
ten
se)
4.
She
sits
at
the
kitc
hen
tabl
e. (
pas
t te
nse)
5.
Her
bro
ther
com
es h
ome
from
sch
ool.
(pas
t te
nse)
6.
He
will
say
“gi
ddyu
p”
to t
he h
orse
. (p
ast
tens
e)
7.
The
neig
hbor
s ra
ised
the
ir ne
w fl
ag. (
pre
sent
ten
se)
8.
We
saw
man
y an
imal
s on
the
farm
. (p
rese
nt t
ense
)
The
spid
er la
ys e
ggs.
I had
two
book
s on
spi
ders
.
The
farm
er’s
dau
ghte
r doe
s he
r cho
res.
She
sat a
t the
kitc
hen
tabl
e.
Her b
roth
er c
ame
hom
e fro
m s
choo
l.
He s
aid
“gid
dyup
” to
the
hors
e.
The
neig
hbor
s ra
ise
thei
r new
flag
.
We
see
man
y an
imal
s on
the
farm
.
94G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_094
.indd
94
8/29
/06
7:1
4:23
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eA
dve
rbs
Less
on
27
Wri
te t
he
adve
rb in
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Th
en w
rite
w
het
her
it t
ells
how
, whe
re, o
r w
hen.
1.
Ant
s w
ork
toge
ther
in c
olon
ies.
2.
We
saw
an
ant
hill
outs
ide.
3.
I obs
erve
d an
ts e
arlie
r.
4.
You
touc
hed
one
ant
gent
ly.
5.
Soon
the
ant
s w
ill d
ig a
nes
t.
6.
Som
e an
ts le
ft a
tra
il he
re.
7.
The
big
ant
mov
es s
low
ly.
8.
Wow
, tho
se a
nts
go e
very
whe
re!
9.
The
ants
car
eful
ly c
arry
a b
read
cru
mb.
10.
Wor
ker
ants
alw
ays
care
for
thei
r q
ueen
.
11.
Now
the
ant
s w
alk
in a
line
.
12.
Thos
e an
ts li
ve u
nder
grou
nd.
Wri
te t
hre
e se
nte
nce
s ab
ou
t yo
ur
day
at
sch
oo
l. U
se a
n a
dve
rb in
eac
h
sen
ten
ce. O
ne
adve
rb s
ho
uld
tel
l ho
w, o
ne
sho
uld
tel
l wh
ere,
an
d o
ne
sho
uld
tel
l wh
en.
toge
ther
, how
Acce
pt re
ason
able
resp
onse
s.
outs
ide,
whe
re
earli
er, w
hen
gent
ly, h
ow
Soon
, whe
n
here
, whe
re
slow
ly, h
ow
ever
ywhe
re, w
here
care
fully
, how
alw
ays,
whe
n
Now
, whe
n
unde
rgro
und,
whe
re
95G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_095
.indd
958/
29/0
67:
14:4
4PM
50 Student Edition pp. 94–95
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 50RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 50 10/4/06 9:19:26 PM10/4/06 9:19:26 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eA
dve
rbs
Less
on
27
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Use
th
e co
rrec
t co
mp
arat
ive
form
of
the
adve
rb in
par
enth
eses
( )
.
1.
This
ant
wor
ks (
hard
) th
an t
hat
ant.
2.
Whi
ch b
utte
rfly
flie
s th
e (lo
w)?
3.
The
shar
k sw
ims
(fas
t) t
han
the
fish.
4.
That
dol
phi
n ju
mp
s th
e (h
igh)
of a
ll.
5.
Thes
e bi
rds
will
fly
sout
h (s
oon)
tha
n th
ose
bird
s.
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Ad
d m
ore
or
the
mos
t b
efo
re t
he
adve
rb.
6.
The
nigh
tinga
le s
ings
b
eaut
ifully
of a
ll th
e bi
rds.
7.
A t
iger
mov
es
sile
ntly
tha
n an
ele
pha
nt.
8.
The
hors
e dr
inks
o
ften
tha
n th
e ca
mel
.
9.
My
dog
wag
s its
tai
l h
app
ily o
f all.
This
ant
wor
ks h
arde
r tha
n th
at a
nt.
Whi
ch b
utte
rfly
flies
the
low
est?
The
shar
k sw
ims
fast
er th
an th
e fis
h.
That
dol
phin
jum
ps th
e hi
ghes
t of a
ll.
Thes
e bi
rds
will
fly
sout
h so
oner
than
thos
e bi
rds.
The
nigh
tinga
le s
ings
the
mos
t bea
utifu
lly o
f all
the
bird
s.
A tig
er m
oves
mor
e si
lent
ly th
an a
n el
epha
nt.
The
hors
e dr
inks
mor
e of
ten
than
the
cam
el.
My
dog
wag
s its
tail
the
mos
t hap
pily
of a
ll.
96G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_096
.indd
968/
29/0
67:
15:3
5PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
27
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft. T
hen
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) I
lik
e sc
ien
ce, a
nd
I w
ork
har
d. (2
) Yes
terd
ay I
rea
d a
bout
spid
ers.
(3) T
od
ay I
stu
die
d t
he
pla
net
s. (4
) I l
earn
ed t
hat
Ear
th
spin
s t
han
Mer
cury
. (5) I
als
o l
earn
ed t
hat
Mer
cury
move
s ar
oun
d t
he
sun
th
e o
f al
l th
e p
lan
ets.
(6) I
wil
l
visi
t a
scie
nce
muse
um
soon
, an
d I
wil
l le
arn
more
th
ere.
1.
Whi
ch w
ord
does
the
adv
erb
in S
ente
nce
1 de
scrib
e?A
IB
like
Csc
ienc
eD
wor
k
2.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
an a
dver
b th
at t
ells
how
?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
2C
Sent
ence
3D
Sent
ence
6
3.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
an a
dver
b th
at t
ells
whe
re?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 2
CSe
nten
ce 3
DSe
nten
ce 6
4.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
does
NO
T ha
ve a
n ad
verb
tha
t te
lls w
hen?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 2
CSe
nten
ce 3
DSe
nten
ce 6
5.
Whi
ch fo
rm o
f an
adve
rb c
ould
go
in t
he b
lank
in S
ente
nce
4?A
fast
Bfa
ster
Cm
ore
fast
erD
fast
est
6.
Whi
ch fo
rm o
f an
adve
rb c
ould
go
in t
he b
lank
in S
ente
nce
5?A
qui
ckB
qui
ckly
Cm
ost
qui
ckly
D
mor
e q
uick
lyGra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
97G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_097
.indd
978/
29/0
67:
15:5
5PM
51 Student Edition pp. 96–97
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 51RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 51 10/4/06 9:19:27 PM10/4/06 9:19:27 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e A
dve
rbs
Less
on
27
Wri
te t
he
adve
rb in
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Th
en w
rite
th
e ve
rb t
hat
it d
escr
ibes
.
1.
My
teac
her
talk
s ex
cite
dly
abou
t sc
ienc
e.
2.
Tom
orro
w w
e w
ill le
arn
abou
t in
sect
s.
3.
Of a
ll th
e st
uden
ts, E
van
stud
ied
the
long
est.
4.
I sp
eak
mor
e so
ftly
tha
n th
e ot
her
stud
ents
at
the
libra
ry.
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Co
mp
lete
it w
ith
an
ad
verb
th
at a
nsw
ers
the
que
stio
n in
par
enth
eses
( )
.
5.
This
sp
ider
cra
wls
t
han
that
sp
ider
. (H
ow?)
6.
I put
my
rep
ort
. (W
here
?)
7.
you
will
lear
n ab
out
the
sun.
(W
hen?
)
exci
tedl
y, ta
lks
Tom
orro
w, l
earn
(will
lear
n)
the
long
est,
stud
ied
mor
e so
ftly,
spe
ak
Poss
ible
resp
onse
s ar
e sh
own.
This
spi
der c
raw
ls m
ore
quic
kly
than
that
spi
der.
I put
my
repo
rt th
ere.
Now
you
will
lear
n ab
out t
he s
un.
98G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_098
.indd
98
8/29
/06
7:1
7:08
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eC
on
trac
tio
ns
Less
on
28
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Rep
lace
th
e un
der
lined
w
ord
s w
ith
a c
on
trac
tio
n.
1.
It is
an
exci
ting
day.
2.
I am
goi
ng t
o be
in a
bak
ing
cont
est.
3.
Som
e ch
ildre
n di
d no
t kn
ow a
bout
the
con
test
.
4.
You
are
brin
ging
tw
o p
ies.
5.
My
brot
hers
are
not
bak
ing
anyt
hing
.
6.
They
had
not
ent
ered
the
con
test
.
7.
The
judg
es w
ere
not
in t
he r
oom
.
8.
They
are
eag
er t
o ta
ste
my
cook
ies.
9.
My
fath
er c
ould
not
com
e to
the
con
test
.
10.
We
shou
ld n
ot e
at t
oo m
uch
cake
.
It’s
an e
xciti
ng d
ay.
I’m g
oing
to b
e in
a b
akin
g co
ntes
t.
Som
e ch
ildre
n di
dn’t
know
abo
ut th
e co
ntes
t.
You’
re b
ringi
ng tw
o pi
es.
My
brot
hers
are
n’t b
akin
g an
ythi
ng.
They
had
n’t e
nter
ed th
e co
ntes
t.
The
judg
es w
eren
’t in
the
room
.
They
’re e
ager
to ta
ste
my
cook
ies.
My
fath
er c
ould
n’t c
ome
to th
e co
ntes
t.
We
shou
ldn’
t eat
too
muc
h ca
ke.
99G
ram
mar
Pra
ctic
e B
oo
k
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_099
.indd
998/
29/0
67:
30:0
2PM
52 Student Edition pp. 98–99
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 52RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 52 10/4/06 9:19:28 PM10/4/06 9:19:28 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
eC
on
trac
tio
ns
Less
on
28
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
, usi
ng
th
e co
rrec
t w
ord
(s)
in p
aren
thes
es (
).
1.
You
hadn
’t (
ever
, nev
er)
told
me
abou
t vo
lcan
oes.
2.
I don
’t k
now
(no
thin
g, a
nyth
ing)
abo
ut t
hem
.
3.
My
brot
her
hasn
’t w
on (
any,
no)
sci
ence
priz
es y
et.
4.
My
sist
er d
oesn
’t h
ave
(non
e, a
ny)
eith
er.
5.
We
have
n’t
told
(an
ybod
y, n
obod
y) a
bout
the
con
test
.
6.
Laur
ie w
ould
n’t
tell
her
frie
nds
(nei
ther
, eith
er).
7.
Car
los
won
’t g
o (a
nyw
here
, now
here
) w
ithou
t a
note
book
.
8.
Isn’
t (n
o on
e, a
nyon
e) in
the
cla
ssro
om?
9.
Thos
e ch
ildre
n ne
ver
ente
r (a
ny, n
o) c
onte
sts.
10.
No
one
said
(no
thin
g, a
nyth
ing)
abo
ut c
lean
ing
up.
You
hadn
’t ev
er to
ld m
e ab
out v
olca
noes
.
I don
’t kn
ow a
nyth
ing
abou
t the
m.
My
brot
her h
asn’
t won
any
sci
ence
priz
es y
et.
My
sist
er d
oesn
’t ha
ve a
ny e
ither
.
We
have
n’t t
old
anyb
ody
abou
t the
con
test
.
Laur
ie w
ould
n’t t
ell h
er fr
iend
s ei
ther
.
Carlo
s w
on’t
go a
nyw
here
with
out a
not
eboo
k.
Isn’
t any
one
in th
e cl
assr
oom
?
Thos
e ch
ildre
n ne
ver e
nter
any
con
test
s.
No o
ne s
aid
anyt
hing
abo
ut c
lean
ing
up.
100
Gra
mm
ar P
ract
ice
Bo
ok
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_100
.indd
100
8/29
/06
7:18
:26
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
28
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft. T
hen
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) M
aria
is
not
goin
g to
giv
e up
! (2)
Sh
e is
mak
ing
an e
lect
ric
buzz
er f
or
her
sci
ence
pro
ject
. (3) S
he
has
not
ever
mad
e on
e bef
ore
, but
her
tea
cher
sh
ow
ed h
er h
ow
. (4) N
ow M
aria
does
n’t
even
nee
d n
o h
elp.
(5) M
aria
’s te
ach
er s
mil
es a
t h
er. (6
) g
lad
th
at s
he’
s in
his
cla
ss.
1.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a co
ntra
ctio
n th
at is
form
ed
with
a p
rono
un?
ASe
nten
ce 2
BSe
nten
ce 4
CSe
nten
ce 5
DSe
nten
ce 6
2.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a co
ntra
ctio
n th
at is
form
ed
with
the
wor
d no
t?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
4C
Sent
ence
5D
Sent
ence
6
3.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
does
NO
T ha
ve t
wo
wor
ds t
hat
coul
d fo
rm a
con
trac
tion?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 2
CSe
nten
ce 3
DSe
nten
ce 5
4.
In
whi
ch s
ente
nce
coul
d yo
u fo
rm a
con
trac
tion
that
in
clud
es a
sub
ject
pro
noun
?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
2C
Sent
ence
4D
Sent
ence
5
5.
Whi
ch is
a c
orre
ct c
ontr
actio
n th
at c
ould
go
in t
he b
lank
in
Sent
ence
6?
AH
e’s
BH
es’
CH
e’d
DH
e’re
6.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
an e
rror
in
it?
ASe
nten
ce 2
BSe
nten
ce 3
CSe
nten
ce 4
DSe
nten
ce 5
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
101
Gra
mm
ar P
ract
ice
Bo
ok
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_101
.indd
101
9/18
/06
6:28
:07
PM
53 Student Edition pp. 100–101
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 53RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 53 10/4/06 9:19:29 PM10/4/06 9:19:29 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e C
on
trac
tio
ns
Less
on
28
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Rep
lace
eac
h c
on
trac
tio
n
wit
h t
he
wo
rds
used
to
fo
rm it
.
1.
Alic
e do
esn’
t se
e th
at w
e’re
wav
ing.
2.
She’
s w
orrie
d th
at w
e ha
ven’
t ar
rived
.
3.
I’m g
lad
that
you
did
n’t
stay
hom
e.
4.
It is
n’t
clea
r th
at h
e’s
the
win
ner.
If t
he
sen
ten
ce is
co
rrec
t, w
rite
cor
rect
. If
it is
no
t, r
ewri
te it
co
rrec
tly.
5.
Wou
ldn’
t yo
u lik
e an
y he
lp?
6.
I don
’t s
ee m
y te
ache
r no
whe
re.
7.
Ther
e w
asn’
t no
body
in t
he c
afet
eria
.
Alic
e do
es n
ot s
ee th
at w
e ar
e w
avin
g.
She
is w
orrie
d th
at w
e ha
ve n
ot a
rriv
ed.
I am
gla
d th
at y
ou d
id n
ot s
tay
hom
e.
It is
not
cle
ar th
at h
e is
the
win
ner.
A po
ssib
le re
spon
se is
sho
wn.
corr
ect
I don
’t se
e m
y te
ache
r any
whe
re.
Ther
e w
asn’
t any
body
in th
e ca
fete
ria.
102
Gra
mm
ar P
ract
ice
Bo
ok
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_102
.indd
10
28/
29/0
6 7
:19:
59 P
M
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
ePu
nct
uat
ion
Less
on
29
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Use
cap
ital
lett
ers
and
co
mm
as c
orr
ectl
y.
1.
my
fath
er m
y si
ster
and
i w
atch
the
sta
rs e
very
nig
ht.
2.
we
sit
outs
ide
in ju
ne ju
ly a
nd a
ugus
t.
3.
ther
e is
a t
eles
cop
e at
sch
ool a
nd i
can
use
it.
4.
mrs
. mor
gan
help
s us
poi
nt t
he t
eles
cop
e to
war
d m
ars.
5.
on m
onda
y w
e lo
ok a
t ju
pite
r bu
t on
tue
sday
we
look
at
satu
rn.
6.
the
sky
is b
right
with
fire
wor
ks o
n in
dep
ende
nce
day.
7.
i lie
in t
he g
rass
clo
se m
y ey
es a
nd li
sten
.
8.
kare
n le
arns
abo
ut t
he p
lane
ts a
t lin
coln
ele
men
tary
sch
ool.
9.
she
read
s bo
oks
look
s at
pic
ture
s an
d as
ks q
uest
ions
.
10.
stud
ents
can
wat
ch a
sho
rt m
ovie
or
they
can
rea
d q
uiet
ly.
My
fath
er, m
y si
ster
, and
I w
atch
the
star
s ev
ery
nigh
t.
We
sit o
utsi
de in
Jun
e, J
uly,
and
Aug
ust.
Ther
e is
a te
lesc
ope
at s
choo
l, an
d I c
an u
se it
.
Mrs
. Mor
gan
help
s us
poi
nt th
e te
lesc
ope
tow
ard
Mar
s.
On M
onda
y w
e lo
ok a
t Jup
iter,
but o
n Tu
esda
y w
e lo
ok a
t Sat
urn.
The
sky
is b
right
with
fire
wor
ks o
n In
depe
nden
ce D
ay.
I lie
in th
e gr
ass,
clo
se m
y ey
es, a
nd li
sten
.
Kare
n le
arns
abo
ut th
e pl
anet
s at
Lin
coln
Ele
men
tary
Sch
ool.
She
read
s bo
oks,
look
s at
pic
ture
s, a
nd a
sks
ques
tions
.
Stud
ents
can
wat
ch a
sho
rt m
ovie
, or t
hey
can
read
qui
etly
.
Gra
mm
ar P
ract
ice
Bo
ok
103
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_103
.indd
103
8/29
/06
7:30
:39
PM
54 Student Edition pp. 102–103
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 54RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 54 10/4/06 9:19:30 PM10/4/06 9:19:30 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
ePu
nct
uat
ion
Less
on
29
Rew
rite
eac
h t
itle
co
rrec
tly.
Th
e w
ord
s in
p
aren
thes
es (
) t
ell w
hat
kin
d o
f ti
tle
each
on
e is
.
1.
Cha
rlie
and
the
Cho
cola
te F
acto
ry (
book
)
2.
In W
hich
Pig
let
Is E
ntire
ly S
urro
unde
d by
Wat
er (
chap
ter
from
a b
ook)
3.
Hic
kory
, Dic
kory
, Doc
k (s
ong)
4.
Rang
er R
ick
(mag
azin
e)
5.
Lake
Cou
ntry
Gaz
ette
(ne
wsp
aper
)
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
. Wri
te t
itle
s co
rrec
tly.
6.
Hav
e yo
u re
ad t
he b
ook
Litt
le H
ouse
on
the
Prai
rie?
7.
My
little
sis
ter
likes
the
son
g Th
ree
Blin
d M
ice.
8.
Robe
rt L
ouis
Ste
vens
on w
rote
a p
oem
cal
led
The
Lam
plig
hter
.
9.
Stud
ents
Sp
eak
is a
col
umn
in o
ur s
choo
l new
spap
er.
Char
lie a
nd th
e Ch
ocol
ate
Fact
ory
“In
Whi
ch P
igle
t Is
Entir
ely
Surr
ound
ed b
y W
ater
”
“Hic
kory
, Dic
kory
, Doc
k”
Rang
er R
ick
Lake
Cou
ntry
Gaz
ette
Have
you
read
the
book
Litt
le H
ouse
on
the
Prai
rie?
My
little
sis
ter l
ikes
the
song
“Th
ree
Blin
d M
ice.
”
Robe
rt Lo
uis
Stev
enso
n w
rote
a p
oem
cal
led
“The
Lam
plig
hter
.”
“Stu
dent
s Sp
eak”
is a
col
umn
in o
ur s
choo
l new
spap
er.
Gra
mm
ar P
ract
ice
Bo
ok
104
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_104
.indd
104
8/29
/06
7:31
:45
PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
29
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft. T
hen
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) M
r. m
erca
do i
s m
y n
eigh
bor
and
he
kn
ows
a lo
t ab
out
the
star
s. (2
) he
gave
me
a book c
alle
d f
ind
th
e co
nst
ella
tion
s. (3
) My
bro
ther
my
bes
t fr
ien
d a
nd
i r
ead
th
e book t
oge
ther
. (4) W
e le
arn
ed
that
th
ere
is a
gro
up
of
star
s n
amed
Urs
a M
ajor.
(5) t
hey
are
sup
pose
d
to l
ook l
ike
a bea
r but
they
just
look l
ike
pre
tty
star
s to
me.
1.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
is N
OT
mis
sing
one
or
mor
e co
mm
as?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 2
CSe
nten
ce 3
DSe
nten
ce 5
2.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
need
s tw
o co
mm
as?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 2
CSe
nten
ce 3
DSe
nten
ce 5
3.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a p
rop
er n
oun
that
sho
uld
be c
apita
lized
?A
Sent
ence
1B
Sent
ence
3C
Sent
ence
4D
Sent
ence
5
4.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
does
NO
T ha
ve a
pro
noun
tha
t sh
ould
be
cap
italiz
ed?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 2
CSe
nten
ce 3
DSe
nten
ce 5
5.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a tit
le t
hat
shou
ld b
e ca
pita
lized
and
un
derli
ned?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 2
CSe
nten
ce 3
DSe
nten
ce 4
6.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a co
rrec
t p
rop
er n
oun?
ASe
nten
ce 1
BSe
nten
ce 2
CSe
nten
ce 3
DSe
nten
ce 4 Gra
mm
ar P
ract
ice
Bo
ok
105
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_105
.indd
105
8/29
/06
7:32
:37
PM
55 Student Edition pp. 104–105
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 55RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 55 10/4/06 9:19:32 PM10/4/06 9:19:32 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e Pu
nct
uat
ion
Less
on
29
Rew
rite
eac
h s
ente
nce
co
rrec
tly.
1.
som
etim
es i
sing
my
favo
rite
song
.
2.
that
son
g is
cal
led
twin
kle,
tw
inkl
e, li
ttle
sta
r.
3.
thos
e th
ree
star
s ar
e na
med
alta
ir ca
stor
and
pol
aris
.
4.
siriu
s is
the
brig
htes
t st
ar in
the
sky
and
i se
e it
at n
ight
.
5.
you
can
read
abo
ut s
tars
in a
mag
azin
e ca
lled
Ask
.
6.
mrs
. won
g re
ads
to c
hild
ren
at t
he li
brar
y in
mid
dlet
own.
7.
she
lives
in n
ew y
ork
but
she
wor
ks in
con
nect
icut
.
8.
toda
y sh
e re
ads
the
book
a c
hild
’s in
trod
uctio
n to
the
nig
ht s
ky.
Som
etim
es I
sing
my
favo
rite
song
.
That
son
g is
cal
led
“Tw
inkl
e, T
win
kle,
Litt
le S
tar.”
Thos
e th
ree
star
s ar
e na
med
Alta
ir, C
asto
r, an
d Po
laris
.
Siriu
s is
the
brig
htes
t sta
r in
the
sky,
and
I se
e it
at n
ight
.
You
can
read
abo
ut s
tars
in a
mag
azin
e ca
lled
Ask.
Mrs
. Won
g re
ads
to c
hild
ren
at th
e lib
rary
in M
iddl
etow
n.
She
lives
in N
ew Y
ork,
but
she
wor
ks in
Con
nect
icut
.
Toda
y sh
e re
ads
the
book
A C
hild
’s In
trodu
ctio
n to
the
Nigh
t Sky
.
Gra
mm
ar P
ract
ice
Bo
ok
106
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_106
.indd
10
68/
29/0
6 7
:33:
26 P
M
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
30
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft. T
hen
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) Y
este
rday
my
clas
s w
ent
to a
n a
nim
al p
ark.
(2) W
e sa
w lio
ns
from
th
e w
ind
ow o
f th
e sc
hoo
l bus.
(3) O
ne
lion
o
n a
roc
k.
(4) M
onke
ys p
laye
d h
app
ily
in t
he
tree
s. (5
) Som
e of
th
em c
ome
exci
ted
ly
to t
he
bus.
(6)
, I w
ill w
rite
a s
tory
about
all th
e an
imal
s I
seen
.
1.
Whi
ch o
f the
se v
erb
form
s co
uld
go in
the
bla
nk in
Se
nten
ce 3
?A
si
tB
se
tsC
sa
tD
se
t
2.
Whi
ch v
erb
need
s th
e he
lpin
g ve
rb h
ave
befo
re it
?A
w
ent
(Sen
tenc
e 1)
B
saw
(Se
nten
ce 2
)C
w
rite
(Sen
tenc
e 6)
D
seen
(Se
nten
ce 6
)
3.
Whi
ch is
the
pas
t-te
nse
form
tha
t co
uld
rep
lace
the
un
derli
ned
verb
in S
ente
nce
5?A
co
mes
B
com
edC
ca
me
D
cam
ed
4.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
an a
dver
b th
at t
ells
whe
n?A
Se
nten
ce 1
B
Sent
ence
2C
Se
nten
ce 4
D
Sent
ence
5
5.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
does
NO
T ha
ve a
n ad
verb
?A
Se
nten
ce 1
B
Sent
ence
2C
Se
nten
ce 4
D
Sent
ence
5
6.
Whi
ch a
dver
b co
uld
go in
the
bl
ank
in S
ente
nce
6?A
To
mor
row
B
Mor
e q
uick
lyC
M
ost
slow
lyD
M
ore
slow
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
107
Gra
mm
ar P
ract
ice
Bo
ok
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_107
.indd
10
78/
29/0
6 7
:34:
42 P
M
56 Student Edition pp. 106–107
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 56RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 56 10/4/06 9:19:33 PM10/4/06 9:19:33 PM
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
© H
arco
urt
• G
rade
3
Nam
e
Less
on
30
Gra
mm
ar–W
riti
ng
Co
nn
ecti
on
Rea
d t
his
par
t o
f a
stud
ent’
s ro
ugh
dra
ft. T
hen
an
swer
th
e q
uest
ion
s th
at f
ollo
w.
(1) L
atis
ha,
Lat
ish
a’s
fath
er a
nd
his
fri
end
wen
t to
Ton
to
Nat
ion
al F
ore
st i
n A
rizo
na.
(2) T
hey
s
tay
lon
g but
they
had
a g
reat
tim
e. (3
) Th
ey c
amp
ed, h
iked
an
d s
wam
on
fri
day
.
(4) O
n S
aturd
ay n
igh
t th
ey s
ang
a so
ng
aroun
d t
he
cam
pfi
re
call
ed “
Mak
e N
ew F
rien
ds.
” (5)
Lat
ish
a d
idn’
t n
ever
wan
t to
lea
ve
the
fore
st.
1.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a co
ntra
ctio
n?A
Se
nten
ce 1
B
Sent
ence
3C
Se
nten
ce 4
D
Sent
ence
5
2.
Whi
ch c
ontr
actio
n co
uld
go in
th
e bl
ank
in S
ente
nce
2?A
do
esn’
tB
ar
en’t
C
coul
dn’t
D
they
’re
3.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
has
a do
uble
ne
gativ
e th
at n
eeds
to
be
corr
ecte
d?A
Se
nten
ce 1
B
Sent
ence
3C
Se
nten
ce 4
D
Sent
ence
5
4.
Whi
ch o
f the
se s
ente
nces
doe
s N
OT
need
a c
omm
a ad
ded?
A
Sent
ence
1B
Se
nten
ce 2
C
Sent
ence
3D
Se
nten
ce 5
5.
Whi
ch o
f the
se s
ente
nces
has
a
pro
per
nou
n th
at is
inco
rrec
t?A
Se
nten
ce 1
B
Sent
ence
3C
Se
nten
ce 4
D
Sent
ence
5
6.
Whi
ch s
ente
nce
is c
orre
ct?
A
Sent
ence
1B
Se
nten
ce 3
C
Sent
ence
4D
Se
nten
ce 5
108
Gra
mm
ar P
ract
ice
Bo
ok
RXE
NL0
8AW
K31_
GPB
_108
.indd
10
88/
29/0
6 7
:35:
37 P
M
57 Student Edition p. 108
RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 57RXENL08ATE31_GPB.indd 57 10/4/06 9:19:34 PM10/4/06 9:19:34 PM